hp LaserJet 2300
series printer
service
hp LaserJet 2300 series printer
service manual _____________
© Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Company, 2003
All Rights Reserved.
Reproduction, adaptation, or
translation without prior written
permission is prohibited, except
as allowed under the copyright
laws.
Part number: Q2472-90911
Edition 1, 5/2003
Warranty
Trademark credits
The information contained in this
document is subject to change
without notice.
Adobe® and PostScript® are
trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated which may be
registered in certain jurisdictions.
Hewlett-Packard makes no
warranty of any kind with respect
to this information. HEWLETTPACKARD SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Hewlett-Packard shall not be
liable for any direct, indirect,
incidental, consequential, or
other damage alleged in
connection with the furnishing or
use of this information.
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714 U.S.A.
UNIX® is a registered trademark
of the Open Group.
ENERGY STAR® is a U.S.
registered service mark of the
United States Environmental
Protection Agency.
Contents
1 Product description
Printer configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Printer features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Power consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Acoustic emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Product overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Print-cartridge and toner safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Laser safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
FCC regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Environmental product stewardship program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Protecting the environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Material safety data sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
HP Printing Supplies Environmental Program information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Service approach. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Bench-repair warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
HP Express Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Information about ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
HP service parts-information compact disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
HP support-assistant compact disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Reseller sales and service support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
ENWW
Contents 3
2 Installation
Site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media input options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 1 media sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional 250-sheet tray (tray 2 or tray 3) paper sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional 500-sheet tray (tray 3) paper sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper sizes for automatic duplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guidelines for selecting paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Envelope specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transparency specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing print media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shipping print media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper fillers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools and suppliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
30
31
33
34
34
35
35
36
37
37
38
39
41
42
43
43
43
44
49
3 Operation
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control-panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing control-panel settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing control-panel menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control-panel menus—user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrieve job menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper-handling menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure device menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control-panel menus—service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
Contents
52
52
54
54
55
55
56
57
59
71
72
72
ENWW
4 Printer maintenance
Periodic inspection of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Cleaning the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Cleaning the fuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Cleaning the outside of the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Managing the print cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
HP print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Non-HP print cartridges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Print-cartridge authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Print-cartridge storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Print-cartridge life expectancy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Checking the supply level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Cartridge-low and cartridge-out conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Supplies status page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
5 Theory of operation
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Basic sequence of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Power-on sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Engine control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Laser/scanner system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Image-formation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Image-formation process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Electrostatic latent-image-formation block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Developing block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Transfer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Fusing block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Drum-cleaning block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Pickup/feed system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Single-sided printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Duplex printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Automatic duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Formatter system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Formatter hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Formatter subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Sheet feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Media detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Media-size detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Jam detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Pickup sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Delivery sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Reversing sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Automatic duplexer sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Paper-feed sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
ENWW
Contents 5
6 Removal and replacement
Removal and replacement strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMM cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top-cover assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left-side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 1 assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal assemblies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 1 pickup roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pickup sensor flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 1 separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 2 pickup roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 2 and 250-sheet feeder separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laser/scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laser/scanner plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-label reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat, flexible cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top-output-bin delivery assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registration-roller assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feed belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
250-sheet feeder and 500-sheet feeder pickup roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
500-sheet feeder separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
Contents
111
111
112
113
113
114
115
116
119
120
121
124
125
126
130
130
132
133
136
139
140
141
143
144
145
147
148
151
152
153
158
159
162
169
172
174
175
176
176
178
ENWW
7 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Preliminary operating checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Basic fault isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Troubleshooting process flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Power-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Troubleshooting with control-panel messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Using the printer online Help system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Resolving persistent messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Troubleshooting the control-panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Interpreting control-panel messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Media-handling problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Printing a configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Printing a Jetdirect configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Printing a usage page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Printing a supplies status page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Printing an engine test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Jam troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Jam causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Typical jam locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Image-formation troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Check the print cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
EconoMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Image defects unique to the HP LaserJet 2300 series printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Image-defect tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Media troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Determine the problem source: print media or printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Isolate a paper path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Isolate a media brand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Isolate a media type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Evaluate media use practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Evaluate environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Communication troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Communications check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Test message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
EIO troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Repetitive defect ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Half-self-test functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Performing a self test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Performing a paper path test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Drum-rotation functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Resetting the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Setting the language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Reference diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
ENWW
Contents 7
8 Parts and diagrams
Ordering parts and supplies and getting support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Consumables, accessories, and supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustrations and parts lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembly locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Covers and panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal components (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal components (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal components (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal components (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-supply assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pickup assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCA locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
250-sheet feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
500-sheet feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alphabetical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numerical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
Contents
242
242
242
243
244
245
245
246
246
248
250
250
252
254
256
258
260
262
263
264
264
266
268
273
ENWW
Figures
Figure 1.
Figure 2.
Figure 3.
Figure 4.
Figure 5.
Figure 6.
Figure 7.
Figure 8.
Figure 9.
Figure 10.
Figure 11.
Figure 12.
Figure 13.
Figure 14.
Figure 15.
Figure 16.
Figure 17.
Figure 18.
Figure 19.
Figure 20.
Figure 21.
Figure 22.
Figure 23.
Figure 24.
Figure 25.
Figure 26.
Figure 27.
Figure 28.
Figure 29.
Figure 30.
Figure 31.
Figure 32.
Figure 33.
Figure 34.
Figure 35.
Figure 36.
Figure 37.
Figure 38.
Figure 39.
Figure 40.
Figure 41.
Figure 42.
Figure 43.
Figure 44.
Figure 45.
Figure 46.
Figure 47.
Figure 48.
Figure 49.
Figure 50.
Figure 51.
Figure 52.
ENWW
Locations of identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Sample identification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Front and right side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Back and left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Top view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Side view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Side view (with an optional 250-sheet tray) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Side view (with an optional 500-sheet tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Interface ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Correct double side seam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Incorrect double side seam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Wet test for long, short, and diagonal grain curl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Measuring curl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Control-panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Supplies status page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Engine control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Laser/scanner system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Image-formation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Image-formation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Step 1: primary charging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Step 2: laser-beam exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Developing block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Step 3: developing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Step 4: transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Step 5: separation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Step 6: fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Step 7: drum cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Step 8: transfer charging roller cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Pickup/feed system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Automatic duplexer path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Automatic duplexer feed and delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Pickup-feed paper path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Sheet-feeder pickup and feed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Media-detection sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Removing the print cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Removing tray 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Removing the I/O cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Removing the print server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Removing the DIMM cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Removing the rear cover (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Removing the rear cover (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Removing the rear cover (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Removing the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Removing the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Removing the top-cover assembly (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Removing the top-cover assembly (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Removing the top-cover assembly (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Removing the left-side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Removing the power switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Removing the tray 1 assembly (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Removing the tray 1 assembly (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Figures 9
Figure 53.
Figure 54.
Figure 55.
Figure 56.
Figure 57.
Figure 58.
Figure 59.
Figure 60.
Figure 61.
Figure 62.
Figure 63.
Figure 64.
Figure 65.
Figure 66.
Figure 67.
Figure 68.
Figure 69.
Figure 70.
Figure 71.
Figure 72.
Figure 73.
Figure 74.
Figure 75.
Figure 76.
Figure 77.
Figure 78.
Figure 79.
Figure 80.
Figure 81.
Figure 82.
Figure 83.
Figure 84.
Figure 85.
Figure 86.
Figure 87.
Figure 88.
Figure 89.
Figure 90.
Figure 91.
Figure 92.
Figure 93.
Figure 94.
Figure 95.
Figure 96.
Figure 97.
Figure 98.
Figure 99.
Figure 100.
Figure 101.
Figure 102.
Figure 103.
Figure 104.
Figure 105.
Figure 106.
Figure 107.
Figure 108.
Figure 109.
Figure 110.
Figure 111.
10 Figures
Removing the tray 1 assembly (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the tray 1 assembly (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the tray 1 pickup roller (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the tray 1 pickup roller (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the pickup sensor flag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the tray 1 separation pad (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the tray 1 separation pad (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the tray 1 separation pad (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the tray 2 pickup roller (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the tray 2 pickup roller (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the tray 2 pickup roller (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the tray 2 and 250-sheet feeder separation pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the fuser (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the fuser (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the laser/scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the e-label reader (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the e-label reader (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the e-label reader (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the formatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the drive assembly (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the drive assembly (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the drive assembly (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the main motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the flat, flexible cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the engine controller PCA (1 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the engine controller PCA (2 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the engine controller PCA (3 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the engine controller PCA (4 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the engine controller PCA (5 of 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the access plate (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the access plate (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the access plate (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the power supply (1 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the power supply (2 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the power supply (3 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the power supply (4 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the power supply (5 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the power supply (6 of 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-supply PCA spring-contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the top-output-bin-delivery assembly (1 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the top-output-bin delivery assembly (2 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the top-output-bin delivery assembly (3 of 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the registration-roller assembly (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the registration-roller assembly (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the transfer roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the feed belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the pickup roller from a 250-sheet or 500-sheet feeder (1 of 2) . . . . .
Removing the pickup roller from a 250-sheet or 500-sheet feeder (2 of 2) . . . . .
Removing the 500-sheet feeder separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting process flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel contrast label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jetdirect configuration page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine test button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine test page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image defects examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repetitive defect ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
182
185
198
199
201
202
211
226
ENWW
Figure 112.
Figure 113.
Figure 114.
Figure 115.
Figure 116.
Figure 117.
Figure 118.
Figure 119.
Figure 120.
Figure 121.
Figure 122.
Figure 123.
Figure 124.
Figure 125.
Figure 126.
Figure 127.
Figure 128.
Figure 129.
Figure 130.
Figure 131.
Figure 132.
Figure 133.
Figure 134.
ENWW
General printer-component locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Locations of switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Locations of sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Locations of solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Location of motors and fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Engine controller PCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Power supply PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
General circuit diagram (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
General circuit diagram (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
General timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Assembly locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Covers and panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Top cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Internal components (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Internal components (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Internal components (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Internal components (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Power-supply assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Pickup assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Engine controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
PCA locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
250-sheet feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
500-sheet feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Figures
11
12 Figures
ENWW
Tables
Table 1.
Table 2.
Table 3.
Table 4.
Table 5.
Table 6.
Table 7.
Table 8.
Table 9.
Table 10.
Table 11.
Table 12.
Table 13.
Table 14.
Table 15.
Table 16.
Table 17.
Table 18.
Table 19.
Table 20.
Table 21.
Table 22.
Table 23.
Table 24.
Table 25.
Table 26.
Table 27.
Table 28.
Table 29.
Table 30.
Table 31.
Table 32.
Table 33.
Table 34.
Table 35.
Table 36.
Table 37.
Table 38.
Table 39.
Table 40.
Table 41.
Table 42.
Table 43.
ENWW
Features for each configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Electrical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Power specifications1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Acoustic emissions specifications1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Operating environment specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Solutions for problem media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Envelope specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Retrieve job menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Information menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Paper-handling menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Configure device menu—printing submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Configure device menu—print-quality submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Configure device menu—system-setup submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Configure device menu—I/O submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Configure device menu—resets submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Basic sequence of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Output area jams recommended actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Paper access area jams—recommended actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Input-area jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Possible causes of frequent jams in the cartridge area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Image defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Adhesive label construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Envelope construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Technical support websites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Consumables, accessories, and supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Common fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Covers and panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Top cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Internal components (1 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Internal components (2 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Internal components (3 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Internal components (4 of 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Power-supply assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Pickup assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Engine controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
PCA locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
250-sheet feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
500-sheet feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Alphabetical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Numerical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Tables 13
14 Tables
ENWW
1
Product description
Chapter contents
Printer configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acoustic emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print-cartridge and toner safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laser safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCC regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental product stewardship program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting the environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Material safety data sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP Printing Supplies Environmental Program information . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bench-repair warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP Express Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information about ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
World Wide Web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP service parts-information compact disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP support-assistant compact disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reseller sales and service support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENWW
16
17
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
22
23
23
24
24
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
Chapter 1 Product description 15
Printer configurations
The HP LaserJet 2300 series printer is available in six configurations.
Note
The illustrations in this guide are based on the HP LaserJet 2300 printer model unless otherwise
stated. To find out which HP LaserJet 2300 configuration you have, look at the label on the front
of the printer.
HP LaserJet 2300L
The HP LaserJet 2300L printer prints letter-size paper at speeds up to 20 pages per minute
(ppm) or A4-size paper at up to 19 ppm. It comes with a built-in 250-sheet tray, a parallel and a
universal serial bus (USB) port, and 32 MB RAM. The printer is expandable, and has one
available enhanced input/output (EIO) slot and two dual inline memory module (DIMM) slots for
adding a network print server card, fonts, and memory.
HP LaserJet 2300
The HP LaserJet 2300 printer is the same as the HP LaserJet 2300L printer, except that it
prints at speeds up to 25 ppm for letter-size paper and 24 ppm for A4-size paper.
HP LaserJet 2300d
The HP LaserJet 2300d printer is the same as the HP LaserJet 2300 printer, except that the
printer comes with 48 MB RAM and automatically duplexes (prints on both sides of paper).
HP LaserJet 2300n
The HP LaserJet 2300n printer is the same as the HP LaserJet 2300 printer, except that it is
designed for network users. It comes with a full-featured HP Jetdirect EIO print server card (for
connecting to a 10/100Base-TX network) and 48 MB RAM.
HP LaserJet 2300dn
The HP LaserJet 2300dn printer is the same as the HP LaserJet 2300n printer, except that the
printer also automatically duplexes (prints on both sides of paper).
HP LaserJet 2300dtn
The HP LaserJet 2300dtn printer is the same as the HP LaserJet 2300dn printer, except that it
has an additional 500-sheet tray.
16 Product description
ENWW
Printer features
The following table describes the features of the HP LaserJet 2300 series printers.
Fast print
speed
●
●
Built-in duplexing
●
Automatic two-sided (duplex) printing is a standard feature of the
HP LaserJet 2300d, HP LaserJet 2300dn, and
HP LaserJet 2300dtn printers.
Print cartridge and status
features
●
The 6,000-page HP Smart Print Cartridge detects and reports toner
status.
The no-shake design maximizes toner use.
The supplies status page provides a toner gauge, page count, and
information about paper sizes that have been used.
●
●
Excellent print quality
●
●
●
●
Flexible paper handling
●
●
●
●
●
●
Expandability
●
●
●
Printer languages and
fonts
●
●
●
ENWW
The HP LaserJet 2300L prints on letter-size paper at speeds up to 20
pages per minute (ppm) or A4-size paper at up to 19 ppm.
All other models print on letter-size paper at speeds up to 25 ppm or
A4-size paper at up to 24 ppm.
FastRes 1200 produces 1200-dpi print quality for fast, high-quality printing
of business text and graphics.
ProRes 1200 produces 1200-dpi printing for the best quality in line art and
graphic images.
Adjustable settings optimize print quality.
The HP Smart Print Cartridge produces crisp, sharp output.
Use tray 1 (the multipurpose tray) for letterhead, envelopes, labels,
transparencies, custom-sized media, postcards, and heavy paper.
Use the adjustable 250-sheet tray (tray 2 or tray 3) for standard sizes of
paper.
Use the 500-sheet tray (tray 3) for letter and A4-size paper.
Two output bins are available: select either the top output bin or the
rear output bin for the most appropriate output location, depending on
media type.
A straight-through paper path is available from tray 1 to the
rear output bin.
Built-in automatic two-sided (duplex) printing is available for the
HP LaserJet 2300d, HP LaserJet 2300dn, and
HP LaserJet 2300dtn printers.
A 250-sheet or 500-sheet tray is available, so that you do not have to add
paper as often.
One EIO card slot is available for interface.
Three DIMM slots are available, two for adding memory and fonts.
Fast printing performance, advanced font and graphics technologies, and
advanced imaging capabilities are benefits of the PCL 6 printer language.
The PCL 6 technology also includes 45 scalable TrueType™ fonts and
one bitmapped line printer font.
The other available languages and fonts are HP PCL5e and PostScript®
(PS) 3 emulation, which includes 35 built-in PS language fonts.
The printer automatically determines and switches to the appropriate
language for the print job.
Chapter 1 Product description 17
Interface connections and
networking
●
●
The printer includes a bidirectional ECP type-B parallel port
(IEEE-1284 compliant) and a USB port (compatible with 1.1 and 2.0 lowand full-speed certified devices)
The printer has an EIO slot for HP Jetdirect EIO print servers so that you
can connect quickly and easily.
Enhanced memory and
memory expansion
●
The HP LaserJet 2300 series printers come with either 32 MB or 48 MB
of memory and can be expanded to 288 or 304 MB, respectively, with the
available memory (DIMM) slots. Most documents can be printed by using
the standard amount of printer memory.
Energy savings
●
The printer automatically conserves electricity by reducing power
consumption when it is not printing.
When the PowerSave feature is activated, the printer conserves energy
when it is not in use.
As an ENERGY STAR® partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined
that this product meets ENERGY STAR® guidelines for energy efficiency.
●
●
Economical printing
●
●
●
N-up printing saves paper by printing multiple pages on one sheet of
media.
Automatic two-sided printing with the built-in duplexer saves paper (the
built-in duplexer is included only with the HP LaserJet 2300d,
HP LaserJet 2300dn, and HP LaserJet 2300dtn printers).
Printing in EconoMode saves toner.
The table below gives a quick summary of the features for each model.
Table 1. Features for each configuration
Features
HP LaserJet
2300L
HP LaserJet
2300
HP LaserJet
2300n
HP LaserJet
2300d
HP LaserJet
2300dn
HP LaserJet
2300dtn
Standard memory
Maximum memory
32 MB
288 MB
32 MB
288 MB
48 MB
304 MB
48 MB
304 MB
48 MB
304 MB
48 MB
304 MB
PostScript 3
emulation
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Automatic duplex
printing
N/A
N/A
N/A
Standard
Standard
Standard
250-sheet feeder
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
500-sheet feeder
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
18 Product description
ENWW
Identification
The model number and printer serial number are listed on identification labels located inside the
top cover (callout 1) and on the rear output bin (callout 2).
2
1
2
Figure 1.
Locations of identification labels
The model number is alphanumeric. The serial number contains information about the country of
origin, as well as the revision level and the production code of the printer. An example of a serial
number is USBB123456.
The identification label on the back of the printer also contains power rating and regulatory
information. See figure 2.
Note
The power rating and regulatory information vary by country/region.
Figure 2.
Sample identification label
ENWW
Chapter 1 Product description 19
Specifications
Physical specifications
Table 2. Physical specifications
HP LaserJet 2300L, 2300,
2300n, 2300d, 2300dn
HP LaserJet 2300dtn
(with 500-sheet tray)
Height
259.7 mm (10.2 inches)
397.2 mm (15.6 inches)
Width
412.8 mm (16.2 inches)
412.8 mm (16.2 inches)
Depth (body)
450 mm (17.7 inches)
450 mm (17.7 inches)
Weight (with print
cartridge)
14.3 kg (31.6 lb)
18.9 kg (41.6 lb)
Electrical specifications
WARNING!
Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not convert
operating voltages. This can damage the printer and void the product warranty.
Table 3. Electrical specifications
Electrical
specifications
110-volt models
220-volt models
Power requirements
110 to 127 V (+/- 10%)
50/60 Hz (+/- 3 Hz)
220 to 240 V (+/- 10%)
50/60 Hz (+/- 3 Hz)
Minimum
recommended circuit
capacity
5.0 amps
2.5 amps
Power consumption
Table 4. Power specifications1
Average power consumption (in watts)
Product model
Printing
(20 ppm)
Printing
(25 ppm)
Standby
PowerSave2
Off
HP LaserJet 2300L
394 W
—
8.8 W
8.6 W
0W
HP LaserJet 2300
—
426 W
8.8 W
8.4 W
0W
HP LaserJet 2300n
—
426 W
9.6 W
9.3 W
0W
HP LaserJet 2300d
—
426 W
8.8 W
8.4 W
0W
HP LaserJet 2300dn
—
426 W
9.6 W
9.3 W
0W
HP LaserJet 2300dtn
—
426 W
9.6 W
9.3 W
0W
1 Values are subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/lj2300 for current information.
2 The PowerSave default activation time is 15 minutes.
20 Product description
ENWW
Acoustic emissions
Table 5. Acoustic emissions specifications1
Sound power level
Declared per ISO 9296
Printing
(HP LaserJet 2300L at 20 ppm)
LWAd = 6.6 bels(A)
Printing
(all other models at 25 ppm)
LWAd = 6.7 bels(A)
PowerSave/standby2
(all models)
Inaudible
Sound pressure level, bystander position
Declared per ISO 9296
Printing
(HP LaserJet 2300L at 20 ppm)
Inaudible
Printing
(all other models at 25 ppm)
LpAm = 52 dB(A)
PowerSave/standby2
(all models)
Inaudible
Sound pressure level, operator position
Declared per ISO 9296
Printing
(HP LaserJet 2300L at 20 ppm)
Inaudible
Printing
(all other models at 25 ppm)
LpAm = 59 dB(A)
PowerSave/standby2
(all models)
Inaudible
1 Values are subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/lj2300 for current information.
2 In standby, no mechanical parts are moving and therefore no sounds are made.
Operating environment
Table 6. Operating environment specifications
Environmental
condition
ENWW
Printing
Storage/standby
Temperature
(printer and print
cartridge)
15 to 32.5 degrees C
(59 to 90.5 degrees F)
-20 to 40 degrees C
(-4 to 104 degrees F)
Relative humidity
10 to 80 percent
10 to 90 percent
Chapter 1 Product description 21
Product overview
Top output bin
Top cover
Tray 1
I/O cover
Tray 2
Control panel
Figure 3.
DIMM cover
Front and right side
Rear output bin
Power connector
Figure 4.
Power switch
Back and left side
22 Product description
ENWW
Safety information
Print-cartridge and toner safety
For information about print-cartridge and toner safety, see the Toner Cartridge Material Safety
Data Sheet (MSDS), which can be obtained at http://www.hp.com/go/msds.
Handling and storage
WARNING!
Keep print cartridges and toner particles away from excessive heat, sparks, and open flames.
If toner is spilled, avoid breathing in toner particles. Inhalation of toner particles causes
respiratory-tract irritation. Vacuum or sweep the material into a bag or other sealed container. A
vacuum specifically designed for cleaning toner can be used if it is capable of filtering fine
particles (5 microns in diameter).
WARNING!
Do not vacuum toner using a conventional vacuum. Toner particles used in this product might be
too fine for effective vacuuming and could result in damage to a conventional vacuum.
Dispose of waste toner in accordance with local requirements. Do not discharge toner particles
in drains.
First aid measures
●
Ingestion. If you ingest toner, rinse your mouth out thoroughly with water and drink several
glasses of water. Get medical attention if symptoms occur.
●
Inhalation. If you inhale toner particles, move to fresh air immediately. If symptoms occur,
consult a physician.
●
Eye contact. If toner comes in contact with your eyes, immediately flush the eyes with plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes. If irritation persists, consult a physician.
●
Skin contact. If toner spills on your skin, remove as much toner as possible with a dry
tissue, and then wash with cold water.
Clothing contact
Note
Toner can stain clothing. Hot water or heat (such as heat from a clothes dryer) can cause toner to
melt and permanently fuse to clothing.
Clothing is best cleaned by removing as much toner as possible with a dry tissue, and then
washing with cold water. Air-dry the clothing.
ENWW
Chapter 1 Product description 23
Laser safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug
Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1,
1976. Compliance is mandatory for products that are marketed in the United States. The printer
is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services
(DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and
Safety Act of 1968.
Because radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings
and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
CAUTION
Using controls, making adjustments, bypassing safety switches, or performing procedures other
than those specified in this service manual can result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
Regulatory information
For regulatory information and requirements, please see the user guide.
FCC regulations
For FCC regulations, please see the user guide.
Declaration of conformity
For the declaration of conformity, please see the user guide.
24 Product description
ENWW
Environmental product stewardship program
Protecting the environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally
sound manner. This product has been designed with several attributes that minimize impacts on
our environment.
Ozone production
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3).
Energy consumption
Energy usage drops significantly while the printer is in PowerSave mode, which saves natural
resources and saves money without affecting the performance of the printer. This product
qualifies for ENERGY STAR ®, a voluntary program established to encourage the development of
energy-efficient office products.
ENERGY STAR ® is a U.S. registered service mark of the United States Environmental Protection
Agency. As an ENERGY STAR ® partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has determined that this
product meets the ENERGY STAR ® guidelines for energy efficiency. For more information, see
http://www.epa.gov/energystar/ .
Toner consumption
EconoMode uses significantly less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge.
Paper use
This product’s automatic two-sided (duplex) printing feature and n-up printing capability (multiple
pages printed on one sheet of paper) can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on
natural resources.
Plastics
Plastic parts more than 25 grams in weight are marked according to international standards that
enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.
HP LaserJet printing supplies
In many countries/regions, this product’s printing supplies (for example, the print cartridge, drum,
and fuser) can be returned to HP through the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling
Program. An easy-to-use takeback program is available in more than 48 countries/regions.
Multilingual program information and instruction are included in every new HP LaserJet print
cartridge and consumables package.
Paper
This printer is suited for the use of recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined
in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. Also, this printer is suitable for the use of
recycled paper according to DIN 19309.
ENWW
Chapter 1 Product description 25
Material safety data sheet
Material safety data sheets (MSDS) can be obtained by contacting the HP LaserJet Supplies
website at http://www.hp.com/go/msds .
HP Printing Supplies Environmental Program information
Since 1990, the HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling Program has collected millions of
used LaserJet print cartridges that otherwise might have been discarded in the world’s landfills.
The HP LaserJet print cartridges and consumables are collected and bulk-shipped to our
resource and recovery partners, who disassemble the cartridges for recycling. After a thorough
quality inspection, selected parts are reclaimed for use in new cartridges. Remaining materials
are separated and converted into raw materials for use by other industries to make a variety of
useful products.
U.S. returns
For a more environmentally-responsible return of used cartridges and consumables,
HP encourages the use of bulk returns. Simply bundle two or more cartridges together and use
the single, pre-paid, pre-addressed UPS label that is supplied in the package. For more
information, call (1) (800) 340-2445 or visit the HP LaserJet Supplies website at
http://www.hp.com/recycle .
Non-U.S. returns
Customers should call their local HP sales and service office or visit http://www.hp.com/recycle
for information regarding availability of the HP Supplies Returns and Recycling Program.
26 Product description
ENWW
Service approach
Bench-repair warranty
The warranty for this product is “return to bench” for a period of one year from the date of
purchase. This means that customers who need warranty repair must return their printer to an
HP repair center or an Authorized Service Provider (ASP). See “Reseller sales and service
support” on page 28.
HP Express Exchange
Through Customer Care Centers in the United States and Canada, customers have an option to
initiate Express Exchange. Under this option, customers can have a factory-refurbished printer
sent to them within 24 hours.
1
The customer contacts the local HP Customer Care Center listed in the product
documentation. A technician troubleshoots the situation and determines whether the printer
has actually failed. If so, the technician refers the customer to the HP Service Center.
2
A representative from the service center requests product and customer information. In
some regions, collateral might also be requested.
3
Hewlett-Packard Company ships a refurbished replacement unit to arrive the next day.
(Geographic distance might prevent next-day shipping.)
4
The customer sends the defective printer to Hewlett-Packard at HP's expense.
Customers with onsite support service provided by HP should work directly with the local
Customer Care Center instead of following the steps outlined here.
Exchanged units carry the remainder of the original unit’s warranty or a 90-day warranty,
whichever is greater. The faster turnaround from HP Express Exchange minimizes downtime
over traditional service programs that require the user to ship the failed unit to the manufacturer
and then wait for it to be repaired and returned. Because HP pays the shipping charges, the user
incurs no hidden costs for the service.
Note
For warranty information and requirements, please see the user guide.
Information about ordering
"Ordering parts" in chapter 8 of this manual contains factory-replacable unit (FRU) and
accessory part numbers. Replacement parts can be ordered from the HP Customer Services
and Support Organization.
Use only accessories that are specifically designed for this printer. Order accessories from an
authorized service or support provider.
ENWW
Chapter 1 Product description 27
World Wide Web
Printer drivers, updated HP printer software, and product and support information can be
obtained from the following URL:
in the U.S., http://www.hp.com/support/lj2300
Printer drivers can be obtained from the following sites:
●
China, ftp://www.hp.com.cn/support/lj2300
●
Japan, ftp://www.jpn.hp.com/support/lj2300
●
Korea, http://www.hp.co.kr/support/lj2300
●
Taiwan, http://www.hp.com.tw/support/lj2300
or the local driver website, http://www.dds.com.tw
HP service parts-information compact disc
This powerful, CD-ROM-based parts-information tool is designed to give users fast, easy access
to parts information, such as pricing and recommended stocking lists, for a wide range of HP
products. To subscribe to this quarterly service in the U.S. or Canada, call (1) (800) 336-5987. In
Asia Pacific countries/regions, call (65) 740-4484. Parts identification and pricing information can
also be found on the World Wide Web at http://www.hp.com/go/partsinfo .
HP support-assistant compact disc
This support tool offers a comprehensive online information system that is designed to provide
technical and product information about Hewlett-Packard products. To subscribe to this quarterly
service in the U.S. or Canada, call (1) (800) 457-1762. In Hong Kong SAR, Indonesia, Malaysia,
or Singapore, call Mentor Media at (65) 740-4477.
Reseller sales and service support
The HP Customer Care Center is available to assist resellers and service technicians. You can
reach this support center in the U.S. or Canada by calling (1) (800) 544-9976.
HP authorized resellers and support
To locate authorized HP resellers and support, call (1) (800) 243-9816 in the U.S. or (1) (800)
387-3867 in Canada.
HP service agreements
Call (1) (800) 743-8305 in the U.S. or (1) (800) 268-1221 in Canada.
Other areas
Outside of North America and Europe, contact your local HP sales office for assistance in
obtaining technical support for resellers and service technicians.
28 Product description
ENWW
2
Installation
Chapter contents
Site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer space requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media input options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 1 media sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional 250-sheet tray (tray 2 or tray 3) paper sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optional 500-sheet tray (tray 3) paper sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper sizes for automatic duplexing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Guidelines for selecting paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Envelope specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Label specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transparency specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing print media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shipping print media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper fillers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing media specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools and suppliers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENWW
30
30
31
33
34
34
35
35
36
37
37
38
39
41
42
43
43
43
44
49
2 Installation 29
Site requirements
Operating environment
The electrical and environmental specifications must be maintained to ensure the correct
operation of this printer. Consider the following points before installing the printer:
30 Installation
●
Install in a well-ventilated, dust-free area.
●
Install on a level, flat, and continuous surface that can support the printer’s weight. Make
sure all four printer feet are level. Do not install on carpet or other soft surfaces.
●
Ensure adequate power supply circuitry (see “Electrical specifications” on page 20).
●
Install where there is stable temperature and humidity, with no abrupt changes (away from
water sources, humidifiers, air conditioners, refrigerators, or other major appliances). See
“Operating environment” on page 21.
●
Install away from direct sunlight, areas with vibration, open flames, ultrasonic heaters,
ammonia fumes, or magnets and devices that emit a magnetic field. If the printer is placed
near a window, make sure the window has a curtain or blind to block any direct sunlight.
●
Maintain enough space around the printer for proper access and ventilation. See “Printer
space requirements” on page 31.
ENWW
Printer space requirements
412.8 mm
(16.25 inches)
450.3 mm
(17.73 inches)
Figure 5.
Top view
407.5 mm
(16 inches)
961.7 mm (37.86 inches)
Figure 6.
ENWW
Side view
2 Installation 31
487.4 mm
(19.2 inches)
Side view (with an optional 250-sheet tray)
Figure 8.
Side view (with an optional 500-sheet tray
543.4 mm
(21.4 inches)
Figure 7.
32 Installation
ENWW
Interface ports
The HP LaserJet 2300 printer has two interface ports:
●
IEEE-1284B Type B parallel port
●
USB port (compatible with 1.1 and 2.0 low- and full-speed certified devices)
The HP LaserJet 2300n, HP LaserJet 2300dn, and HP LaserJet 2300dtn printers also include
an HP Jetdirect EIO print server card that contains a 10/100Base-TX port. You can purchase an
HP Jetdirect EIO print server card for the other HP LaserJet 2300 series printers. See Chapter 8
for information about ordering accessories.
Parallel port
(IEEE-1284B)
USB port
Network EIO port
(RJ-45)
Figure 9.
ENWW
Interface ports
2 Installation 33
Media specifications
General media specifications
The HP LaserJet 2300 series printers accept a variety of media, such as cut-sheet paper
(including up to 100 percent recycled-fiber-content paper), envelopes, labels, transparencies,
and custom-size paper. Properties such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content are
important factors that affect printer performance and output quality. Media that does not meet the
guidelines outlined in this manual can cause the following problems:
●
poor print quality
●
increased jams
●
premature wear on the printer, requiring repair
Note
Some print media might meet all of the guidelines in this manual and still not produce satisfactory
results. This might be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity
levels, or other variables over which Hewlett-Packard has no control.
CAUTION
Using print media that does not meet HP specifications might cause problems for the printer,
requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard warranty or service agreements.
Note
Before purchasing large quantities of paper, make sure the paper meets the requirements specified
in this service manual and in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. Always test print
media before buying large quantities. For more information see the HP LaserJet Printer Family
Print Media Guide at http://www.hp.com/support/ljpaperguide.
34 Installation
ENWW
Media input options
The printer comes with up to three paper trays. The printer automatically selects the requested
media from the correct tray if that media is loaded in any of the trays. If the media is not available,
a message on the control panel prompts you to select the media or tray that you want instead.
Tray 1
Tray 2
(250-sheet tray)
Tray 3
(500-sheet tray,
if installed)
Tray 1 media sizes
Tray 1, a multipurpose tray, adjusts for sizes from 76 by 127 mm (3 by 5 inches) to a legal-size
sheet, 216 by 356 mm (8.5 by 14 inches). Tray 1 should be used when printing the following
types of media:
●
envelopes (see “Envelope specifications” on page 39)
●
labels (see “Label specifications” on page 41)
●
transparencies (see “Transparency specifications” on page 42)
●
custom-sized media, cardstock, or postcards
Tray 1
Minimum size (custom)
76 by 127 mm
(3 by 5 inches)
Maximum size (custom)
216 by 356 mm
(8.5 by 14 inches)
Transparency
Minimum:
76 by 127 mm
(3 by 5 inches)
Maximum:
216 by 356 mm
(8.5 by 14 inches
Labels
Envelopes
ENWW
Dimensions
Weight
Capacity
2
60 to 163 g/m
(16- to 43-lb bond)
100 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20-lb bond) paper
Thickness:
75 (typical)
.10 to .14 mm
(0.0039 to 0.0055 inches)
Thickness:
50 (typical)
.10 to .14 mm
(0.0039 to 0.0055 inches)
Up to 90 g/m2
(16 to 24 lb)
Up to 10
2 Installation 35
Optional 250-sheet tray (tray 2 or tray 3) paper sizes
A 250-sheet tray (tray 2) can be purchased as an accessory if the printer did not come with a
tray 3. Optional 250-sheet trays have settings for the following paper sizes:
CAUTION
●
A4
●
A5
●
B5 (ISO)
●
B5 (JIS)
●
Letter
●
Legal
●
Executive
●
8.5 by 13 inches (FoolsCap, Folio, JIS Exec)
Load only paper in the optional 250-sheet tray. Other types of print media, such as labels or
transparencies, can jam if you try to print on them from either the optional 250-sheet tray or the
optional 500-sheet tray. Load other types of media into tray 1 only.
See the user guide for information about loading media.
36 Installation
Tray 2 and tray 3
Dimensions
Weight
Capacity
Letter
216 by 279 mm
(8.5 by 11 inches)
60 to 105 g/m2
(16- to 28-lb bond)
250 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20-lb bond) paper
A4
210 by 297 mm
(8.3 by 11.7 inches)
Executive
191 by 267 mm
(7.3 by 10.5 inches)
Legal
216 by 356 mm
(8.5 by 14 inches)
B5 (ISO)
176 by 250 mm
(6.9 by 9.9 inches)
B5 (JIS)
182 by 257 mm
(7.2 by 10 inches)
A5
148 by 210 mm
(5.8 by 8.2 inches)
8.5 by 13 in
216 by 330 mm
(8.5 by 13 inches)
ENWW
Optional 500-sheet tray (tray 3) paper sizes
A 500-sheet tray can be purchased as an accessory if the printer did not come with a tray 3. It
has settings for the following paper sizes:
CAUTION
●
A4
●
Letter
Load only paper in the optional 500-sheet tray. Other types of print media, such as labels or
transparencies, can jam if you try to print on them from either the optional 250-sheet tray or the
optional 500-sheet tray. Load other types of media into tray 1 only.
See the user guide for information about loading media.
Tray 3 (500-sheet tray) Dimensions
Weight
Capacity
Letter
216 by 279 mm
(8.5 by 11 inches)
60 to 105 g/m2
(16- to 28-lb bond)
500 sheets of 75 g/m2
(20-lb bond) paper
A4
210 by 297 mm
(8.3 by 11.7 inches)
Paper sizes for automatic duplexing
The automatic duplexer has settings for the following paper sizes:
●
Letter
●
A4
●
Legal
●
8.5 by 13 in
See the user guide for information about loading media.
ENWW
Duplexer
Dimensions
Weight
Letter
216 by 279 mm
(8.5 by 11 inches)
60 to 105 g/m 2
(16- to 28-lb bond)
A4
210 by 297 mm
(8.3 by 11.7 inches)
Legal
216 by 356 mm
(8.5 by 14 inches)
8.5 by 13 in
216 by 330 mm
(8.5 by 13 inches)
2 Installation 37
Guidelines for selecting paper
For best results, use conventional 80-g/m2 (20-lb) paper. Make sure that the paper is of good
quality, and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids, and curled or
bent edges.
If you are unsure about what type of paper you are loading (such as bond or recycled), check the
label on the package of paper.
The following problems with paper can cause print-quality deviations, jamming, or damage to the
printer.
Table 7. Solutions for problem media
Symptom
38 Installation
Problem with paper
Solution
Poor print quality, toner adhesion, Too moist, too rough, too heavy,
or problems with feeding
too smooth, or embossed; faulty
paper lot
Try another kind of paper, between
100 and 250 Sheffield,
and with 4 percent to 6 percent
moisture content
Dropouts, jamming, or curl
Stored incorrectly
Store paper flat in its moistureproof wrapping
Side-to-side variability of paper
Turn paper over
Increased gray background
shading, or printer wear
Too heavy
Use lighter paper; open the rear
output bin
Excessive curl or problems with
feeding
Too moist, wrong grain direction,
or short-grain construction
Open the rear output bin;
use long-grain paper
Side-to-side variability of paper
Turn paper over
Jamming or damage to printer
Cutouts or perforations
Do not use paper with cutouts or
perforations
Problems with feeding
Ragged edges
Use good, high-quality paper
Side-to-side variability of paper
Turn paper over
ENWW
Envelope specifications
Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary considerably, not only between
manufacturers, but also within a box from the same manufacturer. Successful printing on
envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes, consider the
following components:
●
Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 105 g/m2 (28 lb) or jamming
can occur.
●
Construction: Before printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm (0.24 inch) curl,
and should not contain air.
●
Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged.
●
Temperature: Envelopes should be compatible with the heat and pressure of the printer.
●
Size: Envelopes must be within the following size ranges: minimum of 76 by 127 mm (3 by 5
inches) and maximum of 216 by 356 mm (8.5 by 14 inches).
Note
Use only tray 1 to print on envelopes. Send envelopes straight through the printer, entering at
tray 1 and exiting from the rear output bin.
CAUTION
Jams might occur when printing on media that is shorter than 178 mm (7 inches). This can result
from environmental conditions. See "Evaluate environmental conditions" in chapter 7.
Envelopes might meet the general specifications that are listed in table 8 and still not print
satisfactorily because of the printing environment or other variables over which HP has no control.
Table 8. Envelope specifications
ENWW
Description
Specification
Paper
Paper that is used for envelope construction must meet the paper specifications
listed in this manual and the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide.
Basis weight
60 to 100 g/m2 (16 to 27 lb), single thickness. Jamming might result if 100-g/m2
(27-lb) weight is exceeded. See “Moisture-content field test” on page 46.
Finish
Avoid using envelopes that contain adhesive that is exposed to the printer.
Envelopes must be folded accurately so that no more than two thicknesses of
paper occur anywhere along the leading edge. All folds must be well scored and
sharply creased, and construction must be tight (not baggy). Avoid using
envelopes that are stuck together with excess seam gum. See “Furnish (fibercomposition) field test” on page 48.
Fusing compatibility
All inks, adhesives, and other materials that are used in the envelope must be
compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing process. Materials must not
discolor, melt, offset materials, or release hazardous emissions when heated to
200 degrees C (392 degrees F) for 0.1 second. See “Fusing-compatibility field
test” on page 48.
Curl (Pre-printed)
Envelopes must lie flat, with no more than 6 mm (0.25 inch) of curl across the
entire surface. See “Curl field test” on page 47.
Caliper
Caliper of 0.084 to 0.14 mm (.0034 inch to .0056 inch), single thickness. See
“Caliper field test” on page 46.
2 Installation 39
Envelopes with adhesive strips or flaps
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must
use adhesives that are compatible with the heat and pressure in the printer.
CAUTION
The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and can even damage the
fuser and separation pad.
Envelope storage
Proper storage of envelopes contributes to good print quality. Envelopes should be stored flat. If
air is trapped in an envelope and creates an air bubble, then the envelope might wrinkle during
printing.
Envelopes with double side seams
Double-side-seam construction has vertical seams at both ends of the envelope rather than
diagonal seams. This style might be more likely to wrinkle. Be sure that the seam extends all the
way to the corner of the envelope, as illustrated.
Figure 10.
Correct double side seam
Figure 11.
Incorrect double side seam
Envelope margins
The following gives typical address margins for a commercial #10 or DL envelope.
Note
40 Installation
Type of address
Top margin
Left margin
Return address
15 mm (0.6 inch)
15 mm (0.6 inch)
Delivery address
51 mm (2 inches)
89 mm (3.5 inches)
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm (0.6 inch) from the edges of the
envelope. Avoid printing over the area where the envelope seams meet.
ENWW
Label specifications
When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component:
●
Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 200 degrees C (392 degrees F),
which is the printer’s fusing temperature.
●
Arrangement: Only use labels that have no exposed backing between them. Labels can
peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing jams.
●
Curl: Before printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm (0.5 inch) of curl in any
direction.
●
Condition: Do not use labels that have wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation.
Note
Use only tray 1 to print on labels. Send labels straight through the printer, entering at tray 1 and
exiting from the rear output bin
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the printer, use only labels that are recommended for laser printers.
Never print on the same sheet of labels more than once or print on a partial sheet of labels.
ENWW
Description
Specification
Adhesive
Adhesive must not be on any external surfaces of the label before, during, or
after printing. Label construction and die-cutting must not allow labels to peel off
during transport, printing, or fusing.
Caliper
Caliper must not exceed 0.19 mm (0.007 inch). See “Caliper field test” on
page 46.
Curl
In ream: flat within 13 mm (0.5 inch). See “Curl field test” on page 47.
Surface resistivity
2.0 to 15 by 10 to the 10th ohm squared. See “Fusing-compatibility field test” on
page 48.
Volume resistivity
1.2 to 15 by 10 to the 11th ohm-centimeter. See “Fusing-compatibility field test”
on page 48.
Finishing precision
Cut sheet within 0.79 mm (0.031 inch) of nominal and +0.20 degrees square.
Fusing compatibility
All adhesives, carrier sheets, top sheets, and other materials that are used in
label construction must be compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing
process. Materials must not discolor, melt, offset materials, or release hazardous
emissions when heated to 200 degrees C (392 degrees F) for 0.1 second. See
“Fusing-compatibility field test” on page 48.
Packaging
Store in moisture-proof wrap to preserve properties.
Shelf life
One year, maximum, stored at 22 degrees C (72 degrees F) and 50 percent
relative humidity.
2 Installation 41
Transparency specifications
Transparency construction is critical.
Note
Use only tray 1 to print transparencies. Send transparencies straight through the printer, entering
at tray 1 and exiting from the rear output bin.
CAUTION
Transparencies that are used in the printer must be able to withstand 200 degrees C
(392 degrees F), the printer’s fusing temperature.
To avoid damaging the printer, use only transparencies that are recommended for use in laser
printers.
42 Installation
Description
Specification
Surface resistivity
2.0 to 15 by 10 to the 10th ohm squared. See “Fusing-compatibility field test” on
page 48.
Volume resistivity
1.2 to 15 by 10 to the 11th ohm-cm. See “Fusing-compatibility field test” on
page 48.
Finishing precision
Cut sheet within 0.79 mm (0.031 inch) of nominal and +0.20 degrees square.
Fusing compatibility
Transparency materials must be compatible with the heat and pressure of the
fusing process. Materials must not discolor, melt, offset materials, or release
hazardous emissions when heated to 200 degrees C (392 degrees F) for 0.1
second. See “Fusing-compatibility field test” on page 48.
Caliper
Caliper of 0.100 to 0.110 mm (0.0039 to 0.0043 inch). See “Caliper field test” on
page 46.
ENWW
Storing print media
Ideally, the printing and media storage environment should be at or near room temperature, and
not too dry or too humid. Remember that paper is hygroscopic; it absorbs and loses moisture
rapidly.
Heat works with humidity to damage paper. Heat causes the moisture in paper to evaporate,
while cold causes it to condense on the sheets. Heating systems and air conditioners remove
most of the humidity from a room. As a paper package is opened and used, it loses moisture,
which causes streaks and smudging in the printed output. Humid weather or water coolers can
increase the humidity in a room. As paper is opened and used, it absorbs any excess moisture,
which causes light print and dropouts in the printed output. Also, as paper loses and gains
moisture, it can distort. This can cause jams.
As a result, paper storage and handling are as important as the paper-making process itself.
Paper storage environmental conditions directly affect the feed operation.
Users should not purchase more paper than can be easily used in a short time (about three
months). Paper stored for long periods might experience heat and moisture extremes, which can
cause damage. Planning is important to prevent damage to a large supply of paper.
Unopened paper in sealed reams can remain stable for several months before use. Opened
packages of paper have more potential for environmental damage, especially if they are not
wrapped with a moisture-proof barrier.
A well-maintained paper-storage environment ensures optimum printer performance. The
required environmental conditions are 20 degrees to 24 degrees C (68 degrees to
75 degrees F), with relative humidity of 45 percent to 55 percent. The following guidelines should
be helpful when evaluating the papers storage environment:
●
Paper should be stored at or near room temperature.
●
The air should not be too dry or too humid.
●
The best way to store an opened ream of paper is to rewrap it tightly in its moisture-proof
wrapping. If the printer environment is subject to extremes, unwrap only the amount of paper
that will be used during the day's operation to prevent unwanted moisture changes.
Shipping print media
When shipping print media through different environments, plastic-wrap all cartons on the
shipping pallet. When shipping media across bodies of water, also wrap individual cartons. The
packaging must protect the media from physical damage.
Paper fillers
Additional chemicals and fillers are frequently added to paper during the manufacturing process.
These can affect the paper strength, pick resistance, printability, bulk, feel, and color.
An emulsion that contains wax, rosin, starch, or other non-water soluble materials is added to the
paper pulp to help control the penetration of water and other liquids. Dyes are added and the
paper might be bleached. Bleaching is a multistep process that uses chemicals, such as
hydrogen peroxide and chlorine dioxide.
Finely ground fillers, such as clay, talc, and calcium carbonate, might be added to even out the
“peaks and valleys” that occur in the paper mixture, and to serve as brighteners. Over time, these
fillers can build up on internal assemblies of the printer such as rollers or the print cartridge. This
buildup can eventually cause jams and print defects. To minimize this risk, periodically clean the
printer according to procedures (see “Cleaning the printer” on page 75).
ENWW
2 Installation 43
Testing media specifications
The following tests describe ways to make sure that the media meets the specifications listed in
this manual and the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. See “Tools and suppliers” on
page 49 for help in obtaining tools to perform these tests.
Basis-weight field test
The basis weight should be indicated on the ream label. If the label is not available, a simple field
test can identify the basis weight of paper. The basis weight of paper is equal to the weight of
2000 sheets of paper, or four full reams. Weigh a full ream on a postal scale and then multiply
that weight by four. Or, weigh 10 sheets of paper, divide that weight by 10, multiply by 2000, and
then divide by 16.
Note
Amount
Formula
4 reams
weight = basis weight
1 ream
weight x 4 = basis weight
10 sheets
(weight divided by 10) x 2000 and then divided by 16 = basis weight
Example:
10 sheets weigh 1.6 ounces
0.16 ounce x 2000 = 320 ounces
320 ounce ÷ 16 ounce/lb = 20 lb paper
44 Installation
ENWW
Paper weight equivalence table
Use this table to determine approximate equivalent points in weight specifications other than
U.S. bond weight. For example, to determine the equivalent of 20-lb U.S. bond-weight paper in
U.S. cover-weight paper, locate the bond weight (in row 3, second column) and scan across the
row to the cover weight (in the fourth column). The equivalent is 28-b media. Shaded areas
indicate a standard weight for that grade.
U.S. post- U.S. bond
card
weight
thick(lb)
ness*
(mm)
U.S. text/
book
weight
(lb)
U.S.
cover
weight
(lb)
U.S.
bristol
weight
(lb)
U.S. index U.S. tag
weight
weight
(lb)
(lb)
Europe
metric
weight (g/
m2)
Japan
metric
weight (g/
m2)
1
16
41
22
27
33
37
60
60
2
17
43
24
29
35
39
64
64
3
20
50
28
34
42
46
75
75
4
21
54
30
36
44
49
80
80
5
22
56
31
38
46
51
81
81
6
24
60
33
41
50
55
90
90
7
27
68
37
45
55
61
100
100
8
28
70
39
49
58
65
105
105
9
32
80
44
55
67
74
120
120
10
34
86
47
58
71
79
128
128
11
36
90
50
62
75
83
135
135
12
.18
39
100
55
67
82
91
148
148
13
.19
42
107
58
72
87
97
157
157
14
.20
43
110
60
74
90
100
163
163
15
.23
47
119
65
80
97
108
176
176
53
134
74
90
110
122
199
199
16
* The U.S. postcard measurements are approximate. Use for reference only.
Metric Sizes
For metric-size paper (A4), use this method to determine basis weight:
Take 16 sheets of A4 paper and weigh them. One square meter of paper contains approximately
16 A4 size sheets. Compare this weight to the appropriate weight in the preceding table.
ENWW
2 Installation 45
Caliper field test
The specified caliper differs with the type of media used. See “Operating environment” on
page 30.
Use a micrometer to measure for caliper in the field.
CAUTION
Never use the coarse-adjustment end of the micrometer when measuring for caliper. The coarse
adjustment will compress the paper fibers, resulting in an inaccurate reading. For example, if the
fibers are compressed, 6 mil paper could measure as few as 3 mils. Always use the fine adjustment
to measure for caliper.
Using the fine adjustment, slide the micrometer along the edge of the paper and measure at one
end. To double-check the accuracy of the reading, always measure again at the opposite end of
the paper.
Paper-finish field test
Paper finish, or smoothness, can be accurately measured with a Sheffield meter. If this tool is not
available, use a new U.S. dollar bill as a benchmark for comparing paper texture. A dollar bill has
a finish of 350 Sheffields, which is 100 over specifications. If paper feels as rough as a dollar bill,
it is recommended that users avoid continually using this paper in the printer.
Moisture-content field test
Use paper with 4 percent to 6 percent moisture content.
A ream or sheet of paper can be measured with a moisture meter. In general, only evaluate the
customer’s storage environment to determine if excess moisture or dryness is the cause of a
problem with paper.
46 Installation
ENWW
Grain field test
The grain direction is usually specified on the ream label (written out “long” or “short”). The paper
dimensions listed on the label also indicate grain direction. For example, the label for short-grain
letter-size paper reads “11 by 8.5" and for long-grain paper reads “8.5 by 11."
If the grain direction is not included on the ream label, it can be determined by using a simple wet
test. Cut a small square from the corner of a sheet of paper, wet it, and observe the manner in
which it curls.
Envelopes should have a diagonal grain, which gives them the best stability. To determine this,
cut a square section from one corner of an envelope. Wet this section and observe the manner in
which it curls. Two opposite corners should curl toward each other.
Figure 12.
Wet test for long, short, and diagonal grain curl
Curl field test
To check for paper curl, place a single sheet of paper onto a flat surface and measure curl at the
greatest deflection by holding a ruler perpendicular to the flat surface.
Figure 13.
ENWW
Measuring curl
2 Installation 47
Cut-edge condition field test
Use a loupe or maginfying glass to observe the condition of the cut edge. Under magnification, a
good edge appears even. A poorly cut edge shows fraying, jagged edges, compressed fibers,
and other damage.
Furnish (fiber-composition) field test
Use paper made from 100 percent chemical wood pulp and/or cotton fiber. Recycled paper that
contains no more than 5 percent groundwood is also acceptable.
Read the ream label to determine the fiber composition of the paper. Paper is usually specified
as xerographic bond (suitable for copiers or laser printers) or cotton bond. Paper of 25 percent,
50 percent, or 100 percent cotton bond is indicated on a watermark. If paper is less than 25
percent cotton bond, the watermark will not indicate a percentage.
A wood-pulp test kit can also be used to test fiber composition.
Fusing-compatibility field test
Inspect the rollers for ink buildup from preprinted logos or letterhead, and for toner buildup or
spots. Inspect printed output for repetitive defects and smearing. If necessary, have users
contact their forms vendor to ensure that the paper is compatible with HP LaserJet printers.
48 Installation
ENWW
Tools and suppliers
Hewlett-Packard neither warrants nor recommends a particular manufacturer, supplier, or tool.
Products are subject to change and HP has no control over such changes. However, the
following table of tools and their suppliers is provided for convenience.
Tool
Part Number
Supplier Address
Paper moisture meter
Single-sheet clamp probe
2RRDMP
2R43E
Mitchell Instrument
1570DDD Cheroke St.
San Marcos, CA 92069-2433
Temperature/humidity meter
#3T331
Industrial Motor Service
2000 Albright
Montgomery, IL 60538
Sheffield tester: precisionaire column
Sheffield tester: smoothcheck gauge
TM 58-25-01
TM 58-25-02
TMI Testing Machines Inc.
400 Bayview Avenue
Amityville, NY 11701
(516) 842-5400
Wood-pulp test kit
pH test kit
4280-2
4360-2
Shape Products
1127 57th Avenue
Oakland, CA 94621
(800) 444-0015
Resistivity test tool:
precision current/resistance meter
Resistivity test tool:
surface resistivity probe
ENWW
278
96117-1
Monroe Electronics
100 Housel Avenue
PO Box 100
Lyndonville, NY 14098
(800) 821-6001
2 Installation 49
50 Installation
ENWW
3
Operation
Chapter contents
Control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control-panel layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing control-panel settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing control-panel menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control-panel menus—user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retrieve job menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper-handling menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure device menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control-panel menus—service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENWW
52
52
54
54
55
55
56
57
59
71
72
72
Chapter 3 Operation 51
Control panel
This section provides information about the control panel and its features.
Control-panel layout
The control panel contains the following controls:
●
a graphical display that can show up to two lines of messages
●
four navigation buttons:
(SELECT)
●
a
●
a PAUSE/RESUME button
●
a CANCEL JOB button
●
three light-emitting diode (LED) indicator lights: Ready light, Data light, and Attention light
(BACK arrow),
(UP arrow),
(DOWN arrow), and
(HELP) button
See “Troubleshooting with control-panel messages” on page 184 to identify and troubleshoot
control-panel messages.
Graphical display
UP
button
HELP
button
SELECT
button
BACK
button
DOWN
button
PAUSE/RESUME
button
CANCEL JOB
button
READY
light
Figure 14.
52 Operation
DATA
light
ATTENTION
light
Control-panel layout
ENWW
Control-panel buttons
Button
Function
(HELP)
●
Provides information about the message on the graphical display.
(BACK)
●
Backs up one level in the menu tree, or backs up one numeric entry.
Closes menus if it is held down for more than 1 second.
●
PAUSE/RESUME
●
●
(UP)
(SELECT)
Pause: Causes the printer to stop printing the current job and expel all active
pages from the paper path.
Resume: Returns the printer to the ready or busy state from the menus or the
online Help.
●
Navigates to the previous item in the list, or increases the value of numerical
items.
●
Opens menus and navigates through menu levels.
Clears an error condition when the condition can be cleared.
Saves the selected value for an item.
Performs the action associated with the item that is highlighted on the graphical
display.
●
●
●
(DOWN)
●
Navigates to the next item in the list, or decreases the value of numerical items.
CANCEL JOB
●
Cancels the current print job in process and expels all active pages from the
paper path. The time that it takes to cancel the job depends on the size of the
print job. (Press the button only once.)
NOTE: The control-panel lights cycle while the print job is cleared from both the
printer and the computer, and then return to the ready state (Ready light on).
Control-panel lights
Light
State
Indication
Ready
On
The printer is online and ready to accept data to print.
Off
The printer cannot accept data because it is offline (paused)
or has experienced an error.
Blinking
The printer is going offline. The printer stops processing the
current print job and expels all active pages from the paper
path.
On
The printer has data to print, but is waiting to receive all of
the data.
Off
The printer has no data to print.
Blinking
The printer is processing or printing the data.
On
The printer has experienced a problem. Note the message
on the control-panel display, and then turn the printer off and
then on again. See “Troubleshooting with control-panel
messages” on page 184 for help in resolving problems.
Off
The printer is functioning without error.
Blinking
Action is required. See the control-panel display.
Data
Attention
ENWW
Chapter 3 Operation 53
Changing control-panel settings
For a complete list of menu items and possible values, see “Control-panel menus—user” on
page 55. Certain menu options appear only if the associated tray or accessory is installed. For
example, the EIO menu appears only if you have an EIO card installed.
To change a control-panel setting
Note
1
Press
(SELECT) to open the menus.
2
Use
3
Some menus might have several submenus. Use
(UP arrow) or
(DOWN arrow) to
scroll to the submenu item that you want, and then press
(SELECT).
4
Use
(UP arrow) or
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to the setting, and then press
(SELECT).
(DOWN arrow) is held down. An
Some settings change rapidly if
(UP arrow) or
asterisk (*) appears next to the selection on the display, indicating that it is now the default.
5
Press PAUSE/RESUME to close the menu.
(UP arrow) or
(SELECT).
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to the menu that you want, and then press
Printer-driver settings override control-panel settings. Software program settings override both
printer-driver settings and control-panel settings.
If you cannot gain access to a menu or item, it is either not an option for the printer, or you have
not enabled the associated higher-level option. See your network administrator if a function has
been locked (Access denied menus locked appears on the control-panel display).
Printing control-panel menus
To see the current settings for the menus and items that are available at the control panel, print a
control-panel menu map. You might want to store the menu map near the printer for reference.
To print a control-panel menu map
54 Operation
1
Press
(SELECT) to open the menus.
2
Use
(UP arrow) or
(SELECT).
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press
3
Use
(UP arrow) or
(SELECT).
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to PRINT MENU MAP, and then press
ENWW
Control-panel menus—user
Retrieve job menu
Note
The HP color LaserJet 2300 printer and the HP color LaserJet 2300L printer do not include this
menu.
This menu provides a list of the stored jobs in the printer and access to all the job-storage
features. You can print or delete these jobs at the control panel.
The section that follows lists the settings and possible values. In the Values column, the default
value for each setting is the one with an asterisk (*) next to it.
Note
If you turn the printer power off, all stored jobs are deleted.
Table 9. Retrieve job menu
Item
Values
Explanation
[USERNAME]
There is no value to
select.
The name of the person who sent the job.
[JOBNAME]
There is no value to
select.
The name of the job stored in the printer. Select one of your
jobs or all of your private jobs (those that were assigned a
PIN in the printer driver). To select all of your private jobs,
select ALL PRIVATE JOBS.
NO STORED JOBS
There is no value to
select.
Indicates that there are no stored jobs to print or delete.
ALL PRIVATE JOBS
There is no value to
select.
Appears if two or more private jobs are stored in the printer.
Selecting this item prints all private jobs stored in the printer
for that user, after the correct PIN is typed.
Print
There is no value to
select.
Prints the selected job.
ENTER PIN TO
PRINT
*0000 to 9999
A prompt that appears for jobs that were assigned a
personal identification number (PIN) in the printer driver.
You must type the PIN to print the job.
COPIES
*1 to 32000
Is used to select the number of copies that you want to
print.
1-32000: Prints the requested number of copies of the job.
There is no value to
select.
Deletes the selected job from the printer.
*0000 to 9999
A prompt that appears for jobs that were assigned a PIN in
the printer driver. You must type the PIN to delete the job.
Delete
ENTER PIN TO
DELETE
ENWW
Chapter 3 Operation 55
Information menu
The Information menu contains printer information pages that give details about the printer and
its configuration. Scroll to the information page that you want and press
(SELECT).
Table 10. Information menu
Item
Explanation
PRINT MENU MAP
The menu map shows the layout and current settings of the control-panel-menu
items. For more information, see “To print a control-panel menu map” on page 54.
PRINT
CONFIGURATION
The configuration page shows the current printer configuration. If an HP Jetdirect
print server is installed, an HP Jetdirect configuration page will print out as well. For
more information, see “Printing a configuration page” on page 198.
PRINT SUPPLIES
STATUS PAGE
The supplies status page shows the levels of the supplies for the printer, calculation
of the number of pages remaining, and cartridge-usage information. This page is
available only if you are using genuine HP supplies. For more information, see
“Supplies status page” on page 81.
PRINT USAGE PAGE
The usage page shows the quantity of pages printed, as well as the paper source
used. It also shows the number of one-sided versus two-sided pages that have
been printed. For more information, see “Printing a usage page” on page 200.
NOTE: This menu item appears only if a mass-storage device that contains a
recognized file system is installed in the printer, such as an optional flash DIMM.
This item generates a page containing information that can be used for accounting
purposes.
PRINT FILE
DIRECTORY
This menu item appears only if a mass storage device that contains a recognized
file system is installed in the printer, such as an optional flash DIMM. The file
directory shows information for all installed mass storage devices.
PRINT PCL FONT
LIST
The PCL font list shows all the PCL fonts that are currently available to the printer.
PRINT PS FONT LIST The PS font list shows all the PS fonts that are currently available to the printer.
56 Operation
ENWW
Paper-handling menu
If paper-handling settings are correctly configured at the control panel, you can print by selecting
the type and size of paper in the program or printer driver.
Some items on this menu (such as duplex and manual feed) are available in the program or
printer driver (if the appropriate driver is installed). Program and printer-driver settings override
control-panel settings.
The following table lists the settings and possible values. In the Values column, the default value
for each setting is the one with an asterisk (*) next to it.
Table 11. Paper-handling menu
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
TRAY 1 SIZE
*ANY SIZE
LETTER
LEGAL
EXECUTIVE
8.5 x 1
A4
A5
B5 (ISO)
B5 (JIS)
EXECUTIVE (JIS)
DPOSTCARD (JIS)
16K
ENVELOPE #10
ENVELOPE MONARCH
ENVELOPE C5
ENVELOPE DL
ENVELOPE B5
CUSTOM
ANY CUSTOM
Sets the value to correspond with the media size currently
loaded in tray 1.
●
ANY SIZE: If both the type and size for tray 1 are set to
ANY, the printer will pull media from tray 1 first as long as
media is loaded in the tray.
●
A size other than ANY SIZE: The printer does not pull
from this tray unless the type or size of the print job
matches the type or size loaded in this tray.
TRAY 1 TYPE
*ANY TYPE
Sets the value to correspond with the type of paper or other
PLAIN
print media currently loaded in tray 1.
PREPRINTED
●
ANY TYPE: If both the type and size for tray 1 are set to
LETTERHEAD
ANY, the printer will pull media from tray 1 first as long as
TRANSPARENCY
media is loaded in the tray.
PREPUNCHED
●
A type other than ANY TYPE: The printer does not pull
LABELS
from this tray unless the type or size of the print job
BOND
matches the type or size loaded in this tray.
RECYCLED
COLOR
CARDSTOCK>164 G/M2
ROUGH
ENVELOPE
TRAY 2 SIZE
*ANY SIZE
LETTER
LEGAL
EXECUTIVE
8.5 x 1
A4
A5
B5 (ISO)
B5 (JIS)
EXECUTIVE (JIS)
16K
Sets the value to correspond with the paper size currently
loaded in tray 2.
Chapter 3 Operation 57
Table 11. Paper-handling menu (continued)
58 Operation
Item
Values
Explanation
TRAY 2 TYPE
ANY TYPE
PLAIN
PREPRINTED
*LETTERHEAD
TRANSPARENCY
PREPUNCHED
LABELS
BOND
RECYCLED
COLOR
ROUGH
Sets the value to correspond with the paper type currently
loaded in tray 2.
TRAY 3 SIZE
*ANY SIZE
LETTER
A4
Sets the value to correspond with the paper size currently
loaded in tray 3.
NOTE: This menu appears only if a tray 3 is installed.
TRAY 3 TYPE
*ANY TYPE
PLAIN
PREPRINTED
LETTERHEAD
TRANSPARENCY
PREPUNCHED
LABELS
BOND
RECYCLED
COLOR
ROUGH
Sets the value to correspond with the paper type currently
loaded in tray 3.
NOTE: This menu appears only if a tray 3 is installed.
TRAY [N] CUSTOM
There is no value to
select.
This item appears only if a tray is set to a custom size.
UNIT OF MEASURE
INCHES
*MILLIMETERS
Selects the unit of measure to use when you set custom
paper sizes for the specified tray.
X DIMENSION
3.0 to 8.50 INCHES
76 to 216 MM
Sets the measurement of the width of the paper
(measurement from side to side in the tray).
Y DIMENSION
5.0 to 14.00 INCHES Sets the measurement of the length of the paper
127 to 356 MM
(measurement from front to back in the tray).
After the Y DIMENSION value is selected, a summary screen
appears. This screen contains feedback that summarizes all
the information that was selected on the previous three
screens, such as TRAY 1 SIZE= 8.50 x 14 INCHES, Setting
saved.
ENWW
Configure device menu
This menu contains administrative functions.
Printing submenu
Some items on this menu are available in the program or printer driver (if the appropriate driver is
installed). Program and printer-driver settings override control-panel settings. In general, it is
better to change these settings in the printer driver, if applicable.
The following table lists the settings and possible values. In the Values column, the default value
for each setting is the one with an asterisk (*) next to it.
Table 12. Configure device menu—printing submenu
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
COPIES
*1 to 999
Sets the default number of copies by selecting any number
from 1 to 999. Use
(UP arrow) or
(DOWN arrow) to
select the number of copies. This setting applies only to
print jobs that do not have the number of copies specified
in the program or printer driver, such as a UNIX® or Linux
application.
NOTE: It is best to set the number of copies in the
program or printer driver. (Program and printer-driver
settings override control-panel settings.)
DEFAULT PAPER
SIZE
*LETTER
LEGAL
EXECUTIVE
8.5 x 13
A4
A5
B5 (ISO)
B5 (JIS)
EXECUTIVE (JIS)
DPOSTCARD (JIS)
16K
ENVELOPE #10
ENVELOPE MONARCH
ENVELOPE C5
ENVELOPE DL
ENVELOPE B5
CUSTOM
Sets the default image size for paper and envelopes. (The
item name changes from paper to envelope as you scroll
through the available sizes.) This setting applies only to
print jobs that do not have the paper size specified in the
program or printer driver.
DEFAULT CUSTOM
PAPER SIZE
UNIT OF MEASURE
X DIMENSION
Y DIMENSION
Sets a default custom paper size for tray 1. This menu
appears only if the Custom-Standard switch in the
selected tray is set to Custom.
DUPLEX
*OFF
ON
Appears only for printers that include a built-in duplexer
(HP LaserJet 2300d printer, HP LaserJet 2300dn printer,
and HP LaserJet 2300dtn printer). Set the value to ON to
print on both sides (duplex) or OFF to print on one side of a
sheet of paper.
DUPLEX BINDING
*LONG EDGE
SHORT EDGE
Changes the binding edge for duplex printing. The menu
item appears only if the printer includes a built-in duplexer
(HP LaserJet 2300d printer, HP LaserJet 2300dn printer,
and HP LaserJet 2300dtn printer) and DUPLEX=ON.
OVERRIDE A4/
LETTER
*NO
YES
Directs the printer to print an A4-size job on letter-size
paper if A4-size paper is not loaded in the printer (or vice
versa).
Chapter 3 Operation 59
Table 12. Configure device menu—printing submenu
Item
Values
Explanation
MANUAL FEED
*OFF
ON
Feeds the paper manually from tray 1, rather than
automatically from a tray. If MANUAL FEED=ON and tray 1 is
empty, the printer goes offline when it receives a print job.
MANUALLY FEED [PAPER SIZE] appears on the controlpanel display.
COURIER FONT
*REGULAR
DARK
Selects the version of Courier font to use:
●
REGULAR: The internal Courier font available on the
HP LaserJet 4 series printers.
●
DARK: The internal Courier font available on the
HP LaserJet III series printers.
WIDE A4
*NO
YES
Changes the number of characters that can be printed on
a single line of A4-size paper.
●
NO: Up to 78 10-pitch characters can be printed on one
line.
●
YES: Up to 80 10-pitch characters can be printed on
one line.
PRINT PS ERRORS
*OFF
ON
Determines whether a PS error page prints or not.
OFF: PS error page never prints.
ON: PS error page prints when PS errors occur.
PCL
There is no value to
select.
Is used to configure the printer’s PCL settings.
FORM LENGTH
5 to 128 (*60)
Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for default paper
size.
ORIENTATION
*PORTRAIT
LANDSCAPE
Is used to select default page orientation.
NOTE: It is best to set the page orientation in the program
or printer driver. (Program and printer-driver settings
override control-panel settings.)
FONT SOURCE
*INTERNAL
SOFT
SLOT 1, 2, or 3
●
●
●
60 Operation
INTERNAL: Internal fonts.
SOFT: Permanent soft fonts. This option is available
only if it is installed.
SLOT 1, 2, or 3: Fonts stored in one of the three DIMM
slots. This option is available only if it is installed.
FONT NUMBER
*0 to 999 (*0)
The printer assigns a number to each font and lists the
numbers on the PCL Font List. The font number appears
in the Font # column of the printout.
FONT PITCH
0.44 to 99.99
(*10.00)
Selects the font pitch. This item might not appear,
depending on the font selected.
FONT POINT
SIZE
4.00 to 999.75
(*12.00)
Selects the font point size. This appears only if a font with
a scalable point size is selected as the default font.
SYMBOL SET
*PC-8
Several
Selects any one of several available symbol sets at the
control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the
characters in a font. PC-8 or PC-850 is recommended for
line-draw characters.
APPEND CR TO
LF
*NO
YES
Select YES to append a carriage return to each line feed
encountered in backward-compatible PCL jobs (pure text,
no job control). Some environments, such as UNIX,
indicate a new line using only the line-feed control code.
Use this option to append the required carriage return to
each line feed.
ENWW
Print-quality submenu
Some items on this menu are available in the program or printer driver (if the appropriate driver is
installed). Program and printer-driver settings override control-panel settings. In general, it is
best to change these settings in the printer driver, if applicable.
The following table lists the settings and possible values. In the Values column, the default value
for each setting is the one with an asterisk (*) next to it.
Table 13. Configure device menu—print-quality submenu
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
SET REGISTRATION
There is no value to
select.
Shifts the margin alignment to center the image on the
page from top to bottom, and left to right. You can also
align the image that is printed on the front with the image
that is printed on the back.
PRINT TEST
PAGE
There is no value to
select.
Prints a test page to show the current registration settings.
SOURCE
ALL TRAYS
TRAY 1
*TRAY 2
TRAY 3
Selects the tray for which you want to print the test page.
ADJUST TRAY
[N]
X1 Shift
X2 Shift
Y Shift
-20 to 20 (*0)
Sets the registration for the specified tray, where [N] is the
number of the tray. A selection appears for each tray that
is installed, and registration must be set for each tray.
●
X1 SHIFT: Registration of the image on the paper from
side to side, as the paper lies in the tray. For
duplexing, this side is the second side (back) of the
paper.
●
X2 SHIFT: Registration of the image on the paper from
side to side, as the paper lies in the tray, for the first
side (front) of a duplexed page. This item appears only
if the printer includes a built-in duplexer
(HP LaserJet 2300d printer,
HP LaserJet 2300dn printer, and
HP LaserJet 2300dtn printer) and DUPLEX=ON (see
“DUPLEX” on page 59). Set the X1 SHIFT first.
●
Y SHIFT: Registration of the image on the paper from
top to bottom as the paper lies in the tray.
Chapter 3 Operation 61
Table 13. Configure device menu—print-quality submenu
Item
FUSER MODES
PLAIN
PREPRINTED
LETTERHEAD
TRANSPARENCY
PREPUNCHED
LABELS
BOND
RECYCLED
COLOR
CARDSTOCK>164
G/ROUGH
ENVELOPE
RESTORE MODES
Values
*NORMAL
HIGH1
HIGH2
LOW
REDUCE CURL MODE
Explanation
Configures the fuser mode associated with each paper
type.
Change the fuser mode only if you are experiencing
problems printing on certain paper types. After you select
a type of paper, you can select a fuser mode that is
available for that type. The available selections might
include some or all of the following modes:
●
NORMAL: Used for most types of paper.
●
HIGH 1: Used for rough paper.
●
HIGH 2: Used for paper with a special or rough finish.
●
LOW: Used for transparencies.
●
REDUCE CURL MODE: Used to reduce paper curl. Turning
the option on might decrease print quality, because
the setting reduces the amount of heat that the fuser
applies during the printing process. With the lower
temperature, toner might not completely bond to the
media that you are using.
The default fuser mode is NORMAL for all print media types
except transparencies (LOW), and rough paper (HIGH1).
CAUTION: Do not change the fuser mode for
transparencies. Failure to use the LOW setting while
printing transparencies can result in permanent damage to
the printer and fuser. Always select Transparencies as the
Type in the printer driver and set the tray type at the
control panel to TRANSPARENCY.
When selected, RESTORE MODES resets the fuser mode for
each media type back to its default setting.
OPTIMIZE
62 Operation
There is no value to
select.
HIGH TRANSFER
*OFF
ON
Increases the intensity at which toner is transferred to the
media. Set to ON for the following reasons:
●
You are using highly resistive, lower-quality papers.
(HP recommends using only HP paper and print
media.)
●
A combination of low humidity and high temperature is
causing toner to scatter around the characters (halo
effect).
LINE DETAIL
*OFF
ON
Set to ON to combat toner explosion on labels and recycled
media.
MORE
SEPARATION
*OFF
ON
Decreases the possibility for jams in the print-cartridge
area under conditions of high humidity and high
temperature.
RESTORE
OPTIMIZE
There is no value to
select.
Returns to the defaults for the Optimize settings.
ENWW
Table 13. Configure device menu—print-quality submenu
ENWW
Item
Values
RESOLUTION
300
600
*FASTRES 1200
PRORES 1200
Explanation
Selects the resolution. All values print at the same speed.
300: Produces draft print quality and can be used for
compatibility with the HP LaserJet III family of printers.
●
600: Produces high-quality text printing and can be
used for compatibility with the HP LaserJet 4 family of
printers.
●
FASTRES 1200: Produces 1200-dpi print quality for fast,
high-quality printing of business text and graphics.
●
PRORES 1200: Produces 1200-dpi printing for the best
quality in line art and graphic images.
NOTE: It is best to change the resolution in the program or
printer driver. (Program and printer-driver settings override
control-panel settings.)
●
RET
OFF
LIGHT
*MEDIUM
DARK
Use the Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) setting
to produce print that has smooth angles, curves, and
edges.
REt does not affect print quality if the print resolution is set
to FastRes 1200. All other print resolutions benefit from
REt.
NOTE: It is best to change the REt setting in the program
or printer driver. (Program and printer-driver settings
override control-panel settings.)
ECONOMODE
*OFF
ON
Turn EconoMode ON (to save toner) or OFF (for high
quality).
EconoMode creates draft-quality printing by reducing the
amount of toner on the printed page.
NOTE: It is best to turn EconoMode on or off in the
program or printer driver. (Program and printer-driver
settings override control-panel settings.)
CAUTION: HP does not recommend full-time use of
EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time, it is possible
that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in
the print cartridge.
TONER DENSITY
1
2
*3
4
5
Lighten or darken the print on the page by setting the toner
density. Select a setting ranging from 1 (light) to 5 (dark).
The default setting of 3 usually produces the best results.
CREATE CLEANING
PAGE
There is no value to
select.
Press
(SELECT) to print a cleaning page (to clean
toner from the fuser). Open the rear output bin. Follow the
instructions on the cleaning page. For more information,
see “Cleaning the fuser” on page 76.
PROCESS CLEANING
PAGE
There is no value to
select.
This item is available only after a cleaning page has been
created. Follow the instructions on the cleaning page. The
cleaning process might take up to 2.5 minutes.
Chapter 3 Operation 63
System-setup submenu
Items on this menu affect printer behavior. Configure the printer according to your printing needs.
The following table lists the settings and possible values. In the Values column, the default value
for each setting is the one with an asterisk (*) next to it.
Table 14. Configure device menu—system-setup submenu
Item
Values
Explanation
JOB STORAGE LIMIT
1 to 100 (*32)
Specifies the number of quick copy jobs that can be stored
on the printer.
JOB HELD TIMEOUT
*OFF
1 HOUR
4 HOURS
1 DAY
1 WEEK
Sets the amount of time that held jobs are kept before
being automatically deleted from the queue.
SHOW ADDRESS
*AUTO<
OFF
Defines whether or not the printer address is shown on the
display with the READY message.
●
AUTO: The IP address is shown with the READY
message if the device is connected to a network.
●
OFF: The IP address does not appear with the READY
message.
TRAY BEHAVIOR
USE REQUESTED
TRAY<
MANUALLY FEED
PROMPT
Determines how the printer responds to jobs that request
certain trays.
USE REQUESTED
TRAY
*EXCLUSIVELY
FIRST
Determines whether the printer tries to pull media from a
tray other than the one you selected in the printer driver.
●
EXCLUSIVELY: Sets the printer to pull only from the tray
you selected and not pull from another tray, even if the
tray you selected is empty.
●
FIRST: Sets the printer to pull from the tray you
selected first, but allows the printer to pull from
another tray automatically if the tray you selected is
empty.
MANUALLY FEED
PROMPT
ALWAYS
*UNLESS LOADED
Determines when the printer shows a prompt regarding
pulling from tray 1 if your print job does not match the type
or size loaded in any other tray.
●
ALWAYS: Select this option if you always want to be
prompted before the printer pulls from tray 1.
●
UNLESS LOADED: Prompts you only if tray 1 is empty.
DUPLEX BLANK
PAGES
*AUTO
YES
●
●
64 Operation
AUTO: To increase performance, the printer does not
print blank second sides of duplexed pages, except for
Any, Letterhead, Preprinted, or Prepunched paper
types.
YES: All blank pages are printed.
ENWW
Table 14. Configure device menu—system-setup submenu
Item
Values
Explanation
POWERSAVE TIME
1 MINUTE
15 MINUTES
*30 MINUTES
60 MINUTES
90 MINUTES
2 HOURS
4 HOURS
Sets how long the printer remains idle before it enters
PowerSave mode.
PowerSave mode does the following:
minimizes the amount of power the printer consumes
when it is idle
●
reduces wear on electronic components in the printer
(turns off the display backlight, but the display is still
readable)
The printer automatically comes out of PowerSave mode
when you send a print job, press a control-panel button,
open a tray, or open the top cover.
●
To turn PowerSave mode on and off, see “POWERSAVE” on
page 70.
DISPLAY
BRIGHTNESS
1
2
3
4
*5
6
7
8
9
10
Customizes the readability of the display panel for your
environment by lowering or raising brightness.
PERSONALITY
*AUTO
PCL
PS
Selects the default printer language (personality). Possible
values are determined by which valid languages are
installed in the printer.
Normally, you should not change the printer language. If
you change it to a specific printer language, the printer will
not switch automatically from one language to another
unless specific software commands are sent to the printer.
ENWW
CLEARABLE
WARNINGS
*JOB
ON
Sets the amount of time that a clearable warning is shown
on the control-panel display.
●
JOB: The clearable warning message appears until the
end of the job that generated the message.
●
ON: The clearable warning message appears until you
press
(SELECT).
AUTO CONTINUE
OFF
*ON
Determines how the printer reacts to errors. If the printer is
on a network, you probably want to turn AUTO CONTINUE
to ON.
●
ON: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the
message appears on the control-panel display, and
the printer goes offline for 10 seconds before returning
online.
●
OFF: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the
message remains on the control-panel display, and
the printer remains offline until you press
(SELECT).
Chapter 3 Operation 65
Table 14. Configure device menu—system-setup submenu
66 Operation
Item
Values
Explanation
CARTRIDGE LOW
*CONTINUE
STOP
Determines how the printer behaves if the print cartridge is
low. The ORDER CARTRIDGE message first appears when
about 10 percent of the toner remains in the print cartridge
at 5 percent coverage (about 600 pages remaining). Print
quality is not guaranteed if you print after receiving this
message.
●
CONTINUE: The printer continues to print, and the
message appears until you replace the print cartridge.
●
STOP: The printer pauses printing until you replace the
print cartridge or press
(SELECT) before each job
to print it. The message appears until you replace the
print cartridge.
CARTRIDGE OUT
*CONTINUE
STOP
Determines how the printer reacts if the print cartridge is
empty.
●
CONTINUE: The printer continues to print, and the
REPLACE CARTRIDGE message appears until you
replace the print cartridge. HP does not guarantee
print quality if you select CONTINUE after a REPLACE
CARTRIDGE condition. Replace the print cartridge as
soon as possible to ensure print quality.
●
STOP: The printer stops printing until you replace the
print cartridge.
If the end of drum life is reached, the printer stops,
regardless of the CARTRIDGE OUT setting.
JAM RECOVERY
*AUTO
OFF
ON
Determines how the printer behaves if a jam occurs.
AUTO: The printer automatically selects the best mode
for printer jam recovery (usually ON).
●
OFF: The printer does not reprint pages following a
jam. Printing performance might be increased with this
setting.
●
ON: The printer automatically reprints pages after a
jam is cleared.
●
RAM DISK
*AUTO
OFF
Determines how the RAM disk is configured. (This item
does not apply to printers with only 32 MB of RAM, such
as the HP LaserJet 2300L and
HP LaserJet 2300 printers.)
●
AUTO: The printer determines the optimal RAM-disk
size based on the amount of available memory.
●
OFF: The RAM is disabled.
NOTE: If you change the setting from OFF to AUTO or from
AUTO to OFF, the printer automatically reinitializes when it
becomes idle.
LANGUAGE
*ENGLISH
Several others
Selects the language for the messages that appear on the
control-panel display.
ENWW
I/O submenu
Items on the I/O (input/output) menu affect the communication between the printer and the
computer. The submenu appears only when an EIO (enhanced input/output) device is installed
in an EIO slot on the printer (such as an HP Jetdirect print server). The contents of the submenu
depend on which type of EIO card is installed. If the printer contains an HP Jetdirect print server
EIO card, you can configure basic networking parameters by using the submenu. These and
other parameters can also be configured through HP Web Jetadmin or other network
configuration tools, such as Telnet or the embedded Web server.
The following table lists the settings and possible values. In the Values column, the default value
for each setting is the one with an asterisk (*) next to it.
Table 15. Configure device menu—I/O submenu
Item
Values
Explanation
I/O TIMEOUT
5 to 300 (*15)
Select the I/O timeout period in seconds.
Use this setting to adjust timeout for best performance. If
data from other ports appear in the middle of your print
job, increase the timeout value.
PAGE BUFFERING
*OFF
ON
Adjust the buffering so that the engine does not spin up
and down while it waits for information to be transferred.
●
OFF: Indicates maximum performance and the fastest
first page out.
●
ON: Indicates minimum wear, moderate performance,
and slower first page out.
NOTE: This item should be set to ON if you are using USB
1.1 or Ethernet 10 base T and the engine continues to
spin up and down.
PARALLEL INPUT
There is no value to
select.
Configure the parallel features.
HIGH SPEED
NO
*YES
Select YES to enable the printer to accept the faster
parallel communications that are used for connections
with newer computers.
ADVANCED
FUNCTIONS
OFF
*ON
Turn the bidirectional parallel communication on or off. The
default is set for a bidirectional parallel port (IEEE-1284).
The function allows the printer to send status readback
messages to the computer. (Turning the parallel advanced
functions on might slow language switching.)
There is no value to
select.
The [X] represents the slot in which the optional
HP Jetdirect print server is installed, if any. Which of the
following submenus appears depends on the type of print
server that is installed:
●
TCP/IP
●
IPX/SPC
●
APPLETALK
●
DLC/LLC
There is no value to
select.
Use this menu to configure the printer’s TCP/IP settings.
OFF
*ON
Select whether the TCP/IP protocol stack is enabled or
disabled.
EIO [X]
JETDIRECT MENU
TCP/IP
ENABLE
ENWW
Chapter 3 Operation 67
Table 15. Configure device menu—I/O submenu
Item
HOST NAME
Values
Explanation
*NPIXXXXXX
An alphanumeric string (up to 32 characters long) that is
used to identify the device. This name is listed on the
Jetdirect configuration page.
The default host name is NPIXXXXXX, where XXXXXX is
composed of the last six digits of the LAN hardware (MAC)
address.
CONFIG
METHOD
*BOOTP
DHCP
MANUAL
Select whether the TCP/IP configuration parameters are
set automatically from a network server by using BootP
(Bootstrap Protocol) or DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol), or manually from the I/O
submenu.
●
If you select DHCP and a DHCP lease exists, use the
DHCP settings to set DHCP lease options.
●
If you select MANUAL, use the MANUAL settings to
configure TCP/IP parameters.
DHCP
DHCP RELEASE
*NO
YES
This menu appears if CONFIG METHOD is set to DHCP and a
DHCP lease for the print server exists.
●
NO (default): The current DHCP lease is saved.
●
YES: The current DHCP lease along with the leased IP
address are released.
DHCP RENEW
*NO
YES
This menu appears if CONFIG METHOD is set to DHCP
and a DHCP lease for the print server exists.
●
NO (default): The print server does not request to
renew the DHCP lease.
●
YES: The print server requests to renew the current
DHCP lease.
IP ADDRESS
n.n.n.n
The unique IP address of the printer, where n is a value
from 0 to 255.
SUBNET MASK
m.m.m.m
The subnet mask for the printer, where m is a value from 0
to 255. The mask is applied to IP addresses to uniquely
identify subnetworks and nodes.
SYSLOG SERVER
n.n.n.n
The IP address of the syslog server that is used to receive
and log syslog messages.
DEFAULT GATEWAY
n.n.n.n
The IP address of the gateway or route that is used for
communications with other networks.
IDLE TIMEOUT XX
The timeout value (in seconds) before an idle TCP print
data connection is automatically closed. The default value
is 270 seconds. 0 disables the timeout.
There is no value to
select.
Use this menu to configure the printer’s IPX/SPX settings.
ENABLE
OFF
*ON
Select whether the IPX/SPX protocol stack (in Novell
NetWare networks, for example) is enabled or disabled. If
set to OFF, the FRAME TYPE and SOURCE ROUTING items do
not appear.
FRAME TYPE
*AUTO
EN_8023
EN_II
EN_SNAP
TR_8022
TR_SNAP
Select the frame type setting for your network.
●
AUTO (default): Automatically sets and limits the frame
type to the first one detected.
●
For an Ethernet network only, frame type selections
include EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, and EN_SNAP.
●
For a Token Ring network only, frame type selections
include TR_8022 and TR_SNAP.
MANUAL
IPX/SPX
68 Operation
ENWW
Table 15. Configure device menu—I/O submenu
Item
Values
Explanation
*AUTO
OFF
ALL ROUTES
SINGLE ROUTE
For a Token Ring network only, specify the NetWare Token
Ring Source Routing parameter.
AUTO (default): The type of source routing that is required
on the network is automatically sensed.
OFF: All packets are sent without source routing, and only
packets from the same ring are received.
ALL ROUTES and SINGLE ROUTE: All packets are sent with
source routing (broadcasts and when the route is
unknown).
There is no value to
select.
Use this menu to configure the printer’s AppleTalk
settings.
OFF
*ON
For an Ethernet network only, select whether the
AppleTalk protocol stack is enabled or disabled.
There is no value to
select.
Use this menu to configure the printer’s DLC/LLC settings.
OFF
*ON
Select whether the DLC/LLC protocol stack is enabled or
disabled.
SECURE WEB
*HTTPS REQUIREMT
HTTPS OPTIONAL
For configuration management, specify whether the
embedded Web server will accept communications using
HTTPS (Secure HTTP) only, or both HTTP and HTTPS.
HTTPS REQUIRED (default): For secure, encrypted
communications, only HTTPS access is accepted. The
printer server will appear as a secure site.
HTTPS OPTIONAL: Access using either HTTP or HTTPS is
permitted.
RESET SECURITY
*NO
YES
Specify whether the current security settings on the print
server will be saved or reset to factory defaults.
NO (default): The current security settings are maintained.
YES: Security settings are reset to factory defaults.
LINK SPEED
*AUTO
10T HALF
10T FULL
100TX HALF
100TX FULL
For an Ethernet network only, select the network link
speed and the communication mode of the HP Jetdirect
10/100Base-TX print server. The default setting is AUTO,
where the printer automatically configures itself to match
the network link speed (10 or 100 Mbps) and
communication mode (half-duplex or full-duplex).
SOURCE
ROUTING
APPLETALK
ENABLE
DLC/LLC
ENABLE
ENWW
Chapter 3 Operation 69
Resets submenu
Items on the Resets submenu relate to returning settings to the defaults and changing settings
such as PowerSave.
The following table lists the settings and possible values. In the Values column, the default value
for each setting is the one with an asterisk (*) next to it.
Table 16. Configure device menu—resets submenu
Item
Values
Explanation
RESTORE FACTORY
SETTINGS
There is no value to
select.
Performs a simple reset and restores most of the factory
(default) settings. This item also clears the input buffer for
the active I/O. Restoring factory settings does not affect
network parameter settings on the optional HP Jetdirect
print server.
CAUTION: Restoring memory during a print job cancels
the print job.
CLEAR
MAINTENANCE
There is no value to
select.
Clears the PERFORM PRINTER [X] MAINTENANCE warning
message displayed when the printer has reached its
prescribed number of pages printed between regularly
scheduled maintenance operations. Appears only when
the maintenance interval has been exceeded
CHARGER CLEANED
*NO
YES
●
OFF
*ON
Turns PowerSave mode on or off. PowerSave mode does
the following:
●
minimizes the amount of power consumed by the
printer when it is idle
●
reduces wear on electronic components in the printer
(turns off the display backlight, but display is still
readable)
The printer automatically comes out of PowerSave mode
when you send a print job, press a control-panel button,
open a tray, or open the top cover.
You can set how long the printer remains idle before it
enters PowerSave mode. (See “POWERSAVE TIME” on
page 65.)
POWERSAVE
70 Operation
●
YES: Clears CLEAN POST CHARGER message.
NO: Returns display to CLEAN POST CHARGER message.
ENWW
Diagnostics menu
Administrators can use this menu to isolate parts and to troubleshoot jam and print-quality
issues.
The following table lists the settings and possible values. In the Values column, the default value
for each setting is the one with an asterisk (*) next to it.
Table 17. Diagnostics menu
ENWW
Item
Values
Explanation
PRINT EVENT LOG
There is no value to
select.
Press
(SELECT) to generate a list of the 50 most
recent entries in the event log. The printed event log
shows error number, page count, error code, and
description or personality.
SHOW EVENT LOG
There is no value to
select.
Press
(SELECT) to scroll through the contents of the
event log at the control panel and shows the 50 most
(DOWN arrow) to
recent events. Use
(UP arrow) or
scroll through the event log contents.
PAPER PATH TEST
There is no value to
select.
Generates a test page that is useful for testing the
paper-handling features of the printer. The following four
menu items appear after you select PAPER PATH TEST and
press
(SELECT).
PRINT TEST
PAGE
There is no value to
select.
Press
(SELECT) to start the paper path test using the
source (tray), destination (output bin), duplex, and number
of copies settings that you set in the other items on the
PAPER PATH TEST menu. Set the other items before
selecting PRINT TEST PAGE.
SOURCE
ALL TRAYS
TRAY 1
*TRAY 2
TRAY 3
Select the tray that uses the paper path you want to test.
You can select any tray that is installed. Select ALL TRAYS
to test all tray paper paths. (Paper must be loaded in the
selected trays.)
DUPLEX
*OFF
ON
Determine whether or not the paper goes through the
duplexer during the paper-path test. The menu item
appears only if the printer includes a built-in duplexer
(HP LaserJet 2300d printer, HP LaserJet 2300dn printer,
and HP LaserJet 2300dtn printer).
COPIES
*1
10
50
100
500
Set how many sheets of paper are used from each tray
during the paper-path test. If you are testing the optional
stapler stacker (DESTINATION item), select 10 or higher.
Chapter 3 Operation 71
Control-panel menus—service
The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by
authorized service personnel.
The PIN for the HP LaserJet 2300 series printer is: 11230002.
Entering service mode
1
Press
(SELECT).
2
Use
(UP arrow) or
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to SERVICE, and then press
The message SERVICE USE ONLY appears on the control panel.
3
To type the PIN, use
(UP arrow) or
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to the correct number, and
then press
(SELECT) to set that number and move to the next number.
(SELECT).
(SELECT).
For example, for the first number, use
(UP arrow) to scroll to 1. Then press
The printer changes the 1 to * and waits for you to scroll to the next number in the PIN.
4
Finish typing the PIN and press
(SELECT). The following menu items appear.
Table 18. Service menu
Note
72 Operation
Item
Values
Explanation
CLEAR EVENT LOG
There is no value to
select.
Press
TOTAL PAGE COUNT
There is no value to
select.
Press
(SELECT) to view the printer’s total page count.
Use
(UP arrow) or
(DOWN arrow) to adjust the
count, and press
(SELECT) to save the new total.
REFURBISH PAGE
COUNT
There is no value to
select.
Press
(SELECT). A refurbished total of 0 appears in
the control-panel display. Press
(SELECT) again to
(DOWN
reset the count to 0, or use
(UP arrow) or
arrow) to adjust the count, and press
(SELECT) to save
the new total.
SERIAL NUMBER
There is no value to
select.
Press
(SELECT). The control-panel display shows
(DOWN arrow) to
XXXXXXXXXX. Use
(UP arrow) or
set each number, and press
(SELECT) to set the
number and move to the next X. When you have entered
all 10 digits, press
(SELECT) to save the new serial
number.
SERVICE ID
There is no value to
select.
Press
(SELECT). The control-panel display shows the
date the printer was installed (in a YYDDD format) or, if
the date was unavailable when it was installed, *00000.
(DOWN arrow) to change each
Use
(UP arrow) or
0, and press
(SELECT) to set the number and move to
the next 0. When you have entered all five digits, press
(SELECT) to save the new service ID number.
COLD RESET PAPER
*LETTER
A4
Letter is the factory default setting. Use
(UP arrow) or
(DOWN arrow) to select the proper default paper size
and press
(SELECT) to save your selection.
(SELECT) to clear the event log.
See Chapter 7, “Troubleshooting,” for more service features.
ENWW
4
Printer maintenance
Chapter contents
Periodic inspection of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the paper path and print-cartridge areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the fuser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the outside of the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Managing the print cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-HP print cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print-cartridge authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print-cartridge storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print-cartridge life expectancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the supply level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cartridge-low and cartridge-out conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplies status page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENWW
74
75
75
76
76
77
77
77
77
78
78
79
80
81
Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 73
Periodic inspection of parts
Periodic replacement parts are the parts that should be inspected and, if required, replaced at
regular intervals. Failure of these parts can seriously affect the printer’s performance. These
parts should be inspected during a regular service visit near the end of their expected life, and
any that are found to be worn or damaged should be replaced.
The following parts should be inspected and, if required, replaced after approximately 150,000
pages of use:
●
fuser assembly
●
transfer roller
●
separation pads (tray 1, tray 2, and tray 3)
●
pickup rollers (tray 1, tray 2, and tray 3)
●
output feed rollers (upper and lower)
●
transport belts and rollers
See "Removal and replacement" in chapter 6 for procedures to remove and replace these parts.
See "Parts and diagrams" in chapter 8 for the part numbers.
Variables such as media, environment, and usage can cause these parts to wear prematurely.
See "Media specifications" in chapter 2 for information about suitable media, environment, and
usage conditions.
74 Printer maintenance
ENWW
Cleaning the printer
Over time, particles of toner and paper accumulate inside the printer. This can cause print-quality
problems during printing. Cleaning the printer eliminates or reduces these problems.
2
Cleaning the paper path and print-cartridge
areas
Clean the paper path and print-cartridge areas every time that you
change the print cartridge or whenever print-quality problems occur. As
much as possible, keep the printer from dust and debris.
To clean the inside of the printer
3
1
Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord.
2
Open the top cover.
3
Remove the print cartridge.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes.
4
5
Be careful not to touch the transfer roller (the black, rubber roller located
underneath the print cartridge). Skin oils on the roller can cause
print-quality problems.
4
With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe any residue from the paper path area
and the print cartridge cavity.
5
Reinstall the print cartridge and close the top cover.
Note
If the print cartridge is difficult to reinstall, make sure that the registration
plate has been flipped back down into position and that you have
pushed the print cartridge firmly in place.
6
ENWW
Plug in the power cable and turn the printer on.
Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 75
Cleaning the fuser
Run the printer cleaning page to remove toner and paper particles that can sometimes
accumulate on the fuser. Accumulation of toner and particles can cause specks to appear on the
front or back side of your print jobs. (See “Toner specks” on page 212.)
To ensure optimum print quality, HP recommends that you use the cleaning page every time that
you replace the print cartridge or on an automatic interval that you can set up.
The cleaning procedure takes about 2.5 minutes to complete. A message (either CREATING
CLEANING PAGE or CLEANING) appears on the control-panel display while the cleaning is taking
place.
To run the cleaning page
In order for the cleaning page to work correctly, print the page on copier-grade paper (not bond,
heavy, or rough paper).
1
If your printer model includes a duplexer, open the rear output bin.
2
Press
3
Use
(UP button) or
(SELECT button).
(DOWN button) to scroll to CONFIGURE DEVICE, and then press
4
Use
(UP button) or
(SELECT button).
(DOWN button) to scroll to PRINT QUALITY, and then press
5
Use
(UP button) or
(SELECT button).
(DOWN button) to scroll to CREATE CLEANING PAGE, and then press
6
Follow the instructions on the cleaning page to complete the cleaning process.
7
If your printer model includes a duplexer, close the rear output bin.
(SELECT button) to open the menus.
Cleaning the outside of the printer
Clean the outside of the printer with a cloth that has been dampened with water.
CAUTION
Do not use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the printer.
76 Printer maintenance
ENWW
Managing the print cartridge
This section provides information about HP print cartridges, how to store them, how to identify
genuine ones, and their life expectancy. It also provides information about non-HP print
cartridges.
HP print cartridges
When you use a genuine new HP print cartridge, part number Q2610A (6,000-page cartridge),
you can obtain several types of information, such as the following:
●
amount of toner remaining
●
estimated number of pages remaining
●
number of pages printed
●
other supplies information
Non-HP print cartridges
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or
remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control
their quality. Service or repair that is required as a result of using a non-HP print cartridge is not
covered under the printer warranty.
If you use a non-HP print cartridge, the printer is unable to report the levels of the supplies for the
printer, calculation of the number of pages remaining, and cartridge-usage information. The
printer does report a non-HP print cartridge with a message on the control-panel display (Non-HP
cartridge detected).
Print-cartridge authentication
The printer informs you that a print cartridge is not a genuine HP print cartridge when you insert
it into the printer.
If the control-panel message states that this is not a genuine HP print cartridge and you believe
you purchased an HP print cartridge, call the HP fraud hotline. Hewlett-Packard will help
determine if the product is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem.
In the United States, call toll-free: (1) (877) 219-3183.
Outside the United States, you can call collect. Dial the operator and ask to place a collect call to
this telephone number: (1) (770) 263-4745. If you do not speak English, a representative at the
HP fraud hotline who speaks your language will assist you. Or, if someone who speaks your
language is not available, a language-line interpreter will connect approximately one minute after
the beginning of the call. The language-line interpreter is a service that translates between you
and the representative for the HP fraud hotline.
ENWW
Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 77
Print-cartridge storage
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it. Print cartridges
should be stored in an environment ranging from minus-20 degrees Celsius to 40 degrees
Celsius (minus-4 degrees Fahrenheit to 104 degrees Fahrenheit). Store the supply in a
horizontal position in a dark, dry location away from heat and magnetic sources.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes.
Print-cartridge life expectancy
The life of the print cartridge depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require and the
length of life for the components inside the cartridge. When printing text at 5 percent coverage
(typical for a business letter), an HP print cartridge lasts an average of 6,000 pages. This
assumes that toner density is set to 3 and EconoMode is off. (These are the default settings. For
details about these settings, see the description of ECONOMODE and TONER DENSITY in
“Print-quality submenu” on page 61.)
At any time, you can verify life expectancy by checking the supply level, as described in
“Checking the supply level” on page 79.
Note
Hewlett-Packard recommends that a print cartridge be completely used within six months of
opening the cartridge’s packaging.
78 Printer maintenance
ENWW
Checking the supply level
You can check the supply (toner) level using the printer control panel, the embedded Web server,
the printer software, or HP Web Jetadmin.
To check the supply level by using the control panel
1
Press
(SELECT button) to open the menus.
2
Use
3
Use
(UP button) or
(DOWN button) to scroll to PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE, and
then press
(SELECT button). See “Supplies status page” on page 81 for information
about the supplies status page.
(UP button) or
(SELECT button).
(DOWN button) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press
To check the supply level by using the embedded Web server
1
In your Web browser, enter the IP address for the printer home page. This takes you to the
printer status page. See the user guide for more information about the
embedded Web server.
2
On the left side of the screen, click Supplies Status. This takes you to the supplies status
page, which provides supply level information.
To check the supply level by using the printer software
Three things are required to use this feature:
Note
●
The Printer Status and Alerts software on the CD-ROM that came with the printer must be
installed on your computer. Printer Status and Alerts can be installed through the custom
install option on the CD-ROM. See the user guide for more information about Printer Status
and Alerts.
●
The printer must be directly connected to your computer with a parallel cable.
●
You must have access to the Internet.
1
At the lower-right corner of your screen, double-click the Printer icon. This opens the status
window.
2
On the left side of the status window, click the Printer icon from which you want to obtain
status.
3
At the top of the status window, click the Supplies link. You can also scroll down to Supplies
Status.
If you want to order supplies, click Order Supplies. This opens a browser that produces a URL
from which you can purchase supplies. Select the supplies that you want to order, and finish the
ordering process.
To check the supply levels using HP Web Jetadmin
In HP Web Jetadmin, select the printer device. The device status page shows supply-level
information.
ENWW
Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 79
Cartridge-low and cartridge-out conditions
The printer alerts you if the print cartridge is low on toner or out of toner.
When the cartridge is low on toner
When the cartridge is low on toner, the printer control panel shows the ORDER CARTRIDGE
message. The ORDER CARTRIDGE message first appears when about 10 percent of the toner
remains in the print cartridge (at 5 percent coverage, about 600 pages remaining).
The default is for the printer to continue printing until the toner runs out, but you might prefer to
have the printer stop instead of continuing when the ORDER CARTRIDGE message first appears (for
example, if you want print quality to remain consistently high during print jobs, or if you do not
want the cartridge to run out during a long print job). To configure the printer to stop, set
CARTRIDGE LOW=STOP (in the System Setup submenu of the Configure Device menu). (See
“CARTRIDGE LOW” on page 66.) Then, when ORDER CARTRIDGE appears, the printer will stop
printing. You can resume printing by pressing
(SELECT) for each print job.
When the cartridge is out of toner or drum life
The REPLACE CARTRIDGE message appears in one of these situations:
●
When the print cartridge is out of toner. If CARTRIDGE OUT is set to CONTINUE (in the
SYSTEM SETUP submenu of the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu), the printer continues printing
without interaction until the cartridge reaches the end of drum life. HP does not guarantee
print quality after the REPLACE CARTRIDGE message first appears. Replace the print cartridge
as soon as possible. (See “Ordering parts and supplies and getting support” on page 242.)
The REPLACE CARTRIDGE message remains until you replace the print cartridge. If CARTRIDGE
OUT is set to STOP, the printer stops printing until you replace the print cartridge or resume
printing by pressing
(SELECT) for each print job.
●
When the print-cartridge drum life is over. You must replace the print cartridge to continue
printing. No override is possible, even if toner remains in the cartridge. (See “Ordering parts
and supplies and getting support” on page 242.) This situation occurs to protect the printer.
80 Printer maintenance
ENWW
Supplies status page
Use the supplies status page to obtain information about the print cartridge that is installed in the
printer, the amount of life remaining in the print cartridge, and the number of pages and jobs that
have been processed.
Note
You can also obtain supplies status information in the embedded Web server. For details, see
page 79.
To print a supplies status page at the control panel
1
Press
(SELECT) to open the menus.
2
Use
3
Use
(UP) or
(SELECT).
(UP) or
(DOWN) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press
(SELECT).
(DOWN) to scroll to PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE, and then press
1
2
3
4
5
Figure 15.
ENWW
Supplies status page
1
Supplies website
Lists the local website for ordering supplies through the Internet.
2
Cartridge
information
Provides information about the estimated number of pages remaining
for the amount of toner left in the cartridge and the status of the toner
supply, as well as the print-cartridge serial number.
3
Printing statistics
Lists statistics about total number of pages and jobs that have been
processed using this print cartridge and the page count by paper size.
4
Manufacture
information
Shows the installation date and last use date for this print cartridge.
5
Recycling website
Lists the website for information about returning used HP print
cartridges.
Chapter 4 Printer maintenance 81
82 Printer maintenance
ENWW
5
Theory of operation
Chapter contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Basic sequence of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Power-on sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Engine control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Laser/scanner system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Image-formation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Image-formation process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Electrostatic latent-image-formation block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Developing block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Transfer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Fusing block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Drum-cleaning block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Pickup/feed system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Single-sided printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Duplex printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Automatic duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Formatter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Formatter hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Formatter subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Sheet feeders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Media detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Jam detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Pickup sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Delivery sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Reversing sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Automatic duplexer sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Paper-feed sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
ENWW
Chapter 5 Theory of operation 83
Introduction
This chapter presents an overview of the relationships between major components of the
HP LaserJet 2300 printer. The following systems are discussed:
●
engine control
●
laser/scanner
●
image formation
●
pickup and feed
●
formatter
Basic sequence of operation
Operation sequences are controlled by the CPU in the engine controller PCA. Table 19 describes
engine operations for each period of a print operation.
Table 19. Basic sequence of operation
Period
Timing
Purpose
Remarks
WAIT (wait period)
From power-on until
completion of the mainmotor initial drive.
Clears the drum surface
potential and cleans the
transfer charging roller.
Detects whether or not
the cartridge is installed.
Also, during WAIT, the
LEDs cycle and the
HP logo appears on the
control-panel display.
STBY (standby period)
From the end of the WAIT Maintains the printer in a
period until the print
ready state.
instruction command is
received from the
formatter, or from the end
of LSTR until the print
instruction command is
input from the formatter,
or until the power is
switched off.
INTR (initial rotation
period)
From receipt of the print
instruction command
from the formatter until
the media reaches the
top-of-page sensor.
Stabilizes the sensitivity
of the photosensitive
drum in preparation for
printing.
PRINT (print period)
From the end of INTR
until 0.8 seconds after
the top-of-page sensor
detects the trailing edge
of the media.
Forms an image on the
photosensitive drum
according to instructions
from the formatter and
transfers the image to
media.
LSTR (last rotation
period)
From completion of
printing until the main
motor stops rotating.
Delivers the final page
out of the printer and
cleans the transfer
charging roller.
84 Theory of operation
If a print instruction
command is received
from the formatter, the
printer bypasses WAIT
and STANDBY and
immediately enters INTR.
ENWW
Power-on sequence
The the following steps describe the sequence from power-on until the printer enters the standby
(STBY) mode.
ENWW
1
Power-on.
2
CPU initialization.
3
Formatter communication start.
4
Main motor, reverse motor, and fan drive—Reads the paper-detecting status of each sensor
in the printer immediately before driving the main motor, and assesses a jam if residual
media is detected.
5
Residual paper check—After starting the main motor, detection of residual media in the
printer resumes. If residual media is detected, the printer assesses a jam or automatically
delivers the residual media.
6
High-voltage control—Detects the cartridge presence and cleans the transfer charging roller
after the primary charging ac bias is turned on.
7
Failure or abnormality check—Detects door-open, fan-motor, and fuser-unit failures during
the other sequence periods.
Chapter 5 Theory of operation 85
Engine control system
The engine control system coordinates all printer functions. It drives the laser/scanner system,
the image-formation system, and the pickup and feed system.
Figure 16.
Engine control system
The engine controller PCA controls the operation sequence of the printer.
The power supply PCA contains the following components:
●
fuser control circuit—regulates the heat of the fuser
●
high-voltage power supply—applies biases to the primary charging roller, developing
cylinder, transfer charging roller, and fuser film
●
low-voltage power supply—converts ac power to dc power for main motor, scanner motor,
fan, and solenoid function
86 Theory of operation
ENWW
Laser/scanner system
At the laser/scanner assembly, laser beams focus onto the photosensitive drum and discharge
the drum's negative potential. This creates a latent electrostatic image, which later is developed
into a visible image.
The laser diode beams shine onto a scanning mirror. As the mirror rotates, the beams reflect off
the mirror and sweep the page from left to right.
A set of lenses and mirrors focuses the horizontal sweeping beams through the beam access
slots in the rear of the toner cartridge and onto the photosensitive drum. Because the beams
sweep the entire length of the drum while the drum rotates, the entire circumference of the drum
can be covered.
At the beginning of each sweep (before the beams reach the drum), the beam detect mirror
reflects the beams. The momentary pulse of light goes to the engine controller PCA, which
converts the light to an electrical signal that is used to synchronize other activities in the printer
and to diagnose problems with the laser/scanner assembly.
Portions of the drum that are not exposed to the laser still contain the uniform negative potential
that was placed there by the primary charging roller, but the portions that have been exposed to
light have been discharged to ground to form the latent electrostatic image.
Figure 17.
ENWW
Laser/scanner system
Chapter 5 Theory of operation 87
Image-formation system
The image-formation system, which forms a toner image on media, consists of several
interdependent systems.
Figure 18.
Image-formation system
88 Theory of operation
ENWW
Image-formation process
Laser printing requires the interaction of several different technologies, including electronics,
optics, and electrophotographics, to provide a printed page. Each process functions
independently and must be coordinated with the other printer processes. Image formation
consists of the following five processes:
●
electrostatic latent-image formation
●
developing
●
transfer
●
fusing
●
drum cleaning
The five processes contain eight steps, which are shown in figure 19 and described in the
following sections.
Figure 19.
ENWW
Image-formation system
Chapter 5 Theory of operation 89
Electrostatic latent-image-formation block
Step 1: primary charging
A dc bias is applied to the primary charging roller, which transfers a uniform negative potential to
the photosensitive drum.
Figure 20.
Step 1: primary charging
Step 2: laser-beam exposure
The laser beam scans the photosensitive drum to neutralize negative charges on parts of the
drum. An electrostatic latent image is formed on the drum where negative charges were
neutralized.
Figure 21.
Step 2: laser-beam exposure
90 Theory of operation
ENWW
Developing block
The developing cylinder comes in contact with the photosensitive drum to deposit toner onto the
electrostatic latent image.
Note
The charges on the exposed area of the drum are shown as positive in figure 22. The charges are
actually negative, but they are more positive than the charges on the developing cylinder.
Figure 22.
Developing block
Step 3: developing
Toner acquires a negative charge through friction from the developing cylinder and the blade.
When the negatively charged toner comes in contact with the drum, the toner adheres to the
electrostatic latent image. The image on the drum becomes visible because of the toner.
Figure 23.
ENWW
Step 3: developing
Chapter 5 Theory of operation 91
Transfer block
Step 4: transfer
The transfer charging roller, to which a dc positive bias is applied, imparts a positive charge on
the print media. When the print media comes in contact with the photosensitive drum, the toner
is transferred to the print media.
Figure 24.
Step 4: transfer
Step 5: separation
The elasticity of the print media causes its separation from the photosensitive drum. A static
charge eliminator aids separation by weakening any electrostatic adhesion.
Figure 25.
Step 5: separation
92 Theory of operation
ENWW
Fusing block
Step 6: fusing
The dc negative bias applied to the fusing film strengthens the holding force of the toner on the
print media and prevents the toner from scattering.
Figure 26.
ENWW
Step 6: fusing
Chapter 5 Theory of operation 93
Drum-cleaning block
Step 7: drum cleaning
The cleaning blade scrapes the residual toner off of the photosensitive drum and deposits it into
the waste toner case.
Figure 27.
Step 7: drum cleaning
Step 8: transfer charging roller cleaning
Negatively-charged residual toner on the transfer charging roller is collected by the
photosensitive drum when a dc negative bias is applied to the transfer charging roller.
Figure 28.
Step 8: transfer charging roller cleaning
94 Theory of operation
ENWW
Pickup/feed system
When the formatter sends a print command to the engine controller PCB, the main motor and
scanner motor start rotating and the fuser heater temperature control starts.
The paper-feed system automatically picks print media from tray 1, tray 2, or tray 3 (if installed)
and delivers it to the registration roller. Before the media reaches the registration roller, the
separation pad separates any excess sheets of media, and the registration shutter corrects the
media skew.
Single-sided printing
After the top-of-page sensor detects the leading edge of the page, the engine controller PCB
sends a signal to the formatter. This signal functions as a synchronization between the engine
controller PCB and the formatter. This synchronization allows the leading edge of the image on
the photosensitive drum to match the leading edge of the page. After the transferring stage of the
image-formation process, the paper is fed to the fuser assembly by the feed belts.
The delivery sensor detects the exiting paper, which is usually fed to the top or rear output bin
unless duplex is enabled.
Duplex printing
To print duplex, the printer prints one side of the paper, as described in “Single-sided printing,”
transports it to the face-down tray once, and then reverses the paper by feeding it back to the
duplex feed unit.
The face-up sensor detects paper delivered face-down, with one side printed.
The delivery sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper, then signals the engine controller. The
engine controller rotates the reverse motor counterclockwise to send the paper to the duplexer
feed unit.
The reversed paper sensor receives the paper, then signals the engine controller to turn the
duplexer solenoid on. The paper is transported by the oblique roller to the registration roller. If
next paper is picked up, the duplex-fed paper stops at the specified position. The top page
sensor senses the next paper, the specified period of time passes, then the duplex-fed paper is
retransported.
The retransported paper is printed with the other side and delivered to the face-down tray.
ENWW
Chapter 5 Theory of operation 95
Figure 29.
Pickup/feed system
PS501: Reversed paper sensor
PS502: Face-up sensor
PS503: Automatic duplex pickup sensor
PS1305: Tray 2 media sensor
PS2301: Delivery sensor
PS2305: Top-of-page sensor
PS3908: Tray 1 media sensor
SL1: Tray 2 pickup solenoid
SL2: Tray 1 pickup solenoid
SL3: Automatic duplex solenoid
96 Theory of operation
ENWW
Delivery
Figure 30.
ENWW
Delivery
Chapter 5 Theory of operation 97
Automatic duplexer
Figure 31.
Automatic duplexer path
Figure 32.
Automatic duplexer feed and delivery
98 Theory of operation
ENWW
Formatter system
The formatter system is responsible for the following:
●
receiving and processing data from the various printer interfaces
●
monitoring control-panel input and relaying printer status information (through the control
panel and the I/O)
●
developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the print engine
●
storing font information and macros
●
communicating with the host computer
The formatter receives data from the I/O and converts it into a dot image. The formatter then
sends a print signal to the engine controller assembly. The engine controller assembly
synchronizes the image-formation system with the paper-feed system, and signals the formatter
to send the print-image data. The formatter sends the print-image data (dots) in the form of a
video signal and the printing process begins.
ENWW
Chapter 5 Theory of operation 99
Formatter hardware
The formatter system contains the following:
●
CPU—Is a 266 Mhz RISC microprocessor.
●
Read-only memory (ROM)—Stores the dot patterns of internal character sets (fonts) in
addition to storing microprocessor control programs.
●
Random-access memory (RAM)—Stores printing and font information received from the
host system, and can also serve to temporarily store a full page of print-image data before
the data is sent to the print engine. Increasing the RAM will increase performance of graphic
intense printing operations but it will not increase the I/O buffer space or cause the printer to
print more pages per minute.
●
Nonvolatile memory (NVRAM)—Stores information about the I/O and print environment
configuration. The printer keeps the contents of NVRAM when the power is turned off or
disconnected. (As in other HP LaserJet printers, downloaded fonts and macros are saved in
conventional RAM and are lost when power is turned off.)
●
Interfaces
• Parallel interface—Receives incoming data through its IEEE1284 B interface connector.
The IEEE1284 B interface provides high-speed, two-way communication between the
printer and the host, letting the user change printer settings from the host computer.
• USB—Receives incoming data through its universal serial bus (USB) connector. The USB
interface provides high-speed, two-way communication between the printer and the host,
letting the user change printer settings computer.
• EIO—The PCI-based enhanced input/output (EIO) slots support a wide range of print
servers and other add-on devices. HP JetDirect EIO cards provide high-speed, two-way
communication for network printing over Ethernet, Ethernet and LocalTalk, Token Ring, or
Fast Ethernet networks.
100 Theory of operation
ENWW
Formatter subsystem
Resolution Enhancement technology (300 and 600 dpi only)
This subsystem contains circuitry for Resolution Enhancement technology (REt), which modifies
the standard video dot data on its way to the engine controller assembly to produce smoothed
black-to-white boundaries. The default is on.
Print-density adjustment
This subsystem controls the line width (boldness) of the print image. This is accomplished by
varying the developer dc bias, which controls the amount of toner that is applied to the
photosensitive drum. Settings range from 1 (lightest) to 5 (darkest). The default is 3.
EconoMode
EconoMode uses less toner than standard mode printing by reducing the dot density. Users can
adjust EconoMode, which can also be thought of as draft mode, through software applications.
The default setting is off. EconoMode does not affect print speed or memory usage.
Memory management
This printer uses various methods to conserve and make the most of available memory. Several
of these methods are explained in the following sections‘.
Memory Enhancement technology
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) enhances the printer's standard memory through a
variety of font and data compression methods. The feature also automatically compresses fonts
for desktop publishing applications. The feature is available in all printing modes (PCL 5e, PCL 6,
and PS). When printing graphics, MEt analyzes each page as it is being printed and
automatically applies a variety of compression techniques to print the complete page at the
correct resolution.
Image Adapt
Image Adapt uses a compression technique so that you can print full-page graphics from the
printer's base memory. Image Adapt is only used in PCL 5e (PCL 6 and PS do not require Image
Adapt). The available settings are auto, on, and off. The default is auto.
Some data might be lost if Image Adapt is used. To see if there has been a loss of graphic detail,
print a self-test page and check the Image Adapt Used line in the Printer Information section. If
the printer invoked Image Adapt since the last time the self test was printed (or the last time the
printer was turned off and on), that line reads “Image Adapt Used: Yes.”
Page Protect
A page's complexity (rules, complex graphics, or dense text) might exceed the printer's ability to
create the page image fast enough to keep pace with the engine's printing process. If a page is
too complex, it might print in parts (for example, the top half of data might appear on one page
and the bottom half on the next page). Some print data loss is likely in these instances, and the
printer Attention light flashes.
Using Page Protect, the formatter creates the entire page image in memory before moving the
paper through the printer. This process ensures that the entire page is printed. The default is off,
which provides the best performance. Page Protect should only be enabled when necessary.
ENWW
Chapter 5 Theory of operation 101
Printer Job Language overview
Printer Job Language (PJL) is an integral part of the printer’s configuration, in addition to the
standard Printer Command Language (PCL). The printer uses PJL to perform certain functions:
●
Two-way communication with the host computer through an IEEE1284 B interface
connection. The printer can communicate information to the host, such as the control-panel
settings, and the control-panel settings can be set from the host.
●
Dynamic I/O switching allows the printer to be configured with a host on each I/O. The
printer can receive data from more than one I/O simultaneously until the buffer is full. This
can occur even when the printer is offline.
●
Context-sensitive switching allows the printer to automatically recognize the personalities
(PS or PCL) of each host and configure itself to serve that personality.
●
Isolating print environment settings from one print job to the next. For example, if a print
job is sent to the printer in landscape mode, subsequent print jobs print only in landscape if
they are formatted for landscape printing.
For more information, see the HP LaserJet 2300 Series Printer Software Technical Reference.
The complete PJL Status Code listing is contained in the appendix of the Printer Job Language
Technical Reference. Also see HP’s website at http://www.hp.com .
102 Theory of operation
ENWW
Sheet feeders
HP LaserJet 2300 series printers can use two optional sheet feeders: the 250-sheet feeder and
the 500-sheet feeder.
The sheet feeders are driven by the printer and controlled by the printer’s engine controller. The
engine controller drives the solenoid at a necessary timing through the sheet feeder PCA. The
paper sensor detects media.
The sheet feeder picks up media loaded in the cassettes and transports it to the printer.
The flow of media is illustrated in figure 33 (the 500-sheet paper feeder is shown).
Figure 33.
Pickup-feed paper path
The main motor (M903) uses gears to drive the sheet feeder.
When a print command is received from the formatter, the main motor (M903), reverse motor
(M904), and scanner motor start rotating. The heating element temperature begins to rise.
The sheet feeder pickup solenoids (SL2001, SL2002) are turned on when the following three
requirements are met:
●
the main motor has been driven for 0.35 seconds
●
the scanner motor has reached the specified rotation number
●
the heating element temperature has been brought to the specified temperature, or the
specified period of time has elapsed after start of the temperature control
SL2001 and SL2002 transmit the main motor’s rotation to the pickup roller. The pickup roller
makes a rotation to pick up media in the cassette.
The separation pad separates the media and transports it to the printer. The media goes through
the transfer, separation, and fuser/delivery blocks, and is delivered to the selected tray.
ENWW
Chapter 5 Theory of operation 103
M903
Paper feeder pickup solenoid
drive signal (/FDSN, /FDSOL)
Top-of-page detection signal (/TOPSNS)
Power supply PCA
Top output bin
delivery rollers
M904
Paper feeder paper detection
signal (/FDSNS)
Main motor drive signal
Reverse motor drive signal
Engine controller PCA
Paper feeder PCA
Main motor
Reverse motor
Photosensitive
drum
Registration shutter
Feed belts
Pressure roller
PS2305
SL2002
(SL2001)
Transfer charging roller
Registration roller
Feed rollers
PS2003
(PS2001)
Feed roller
Pickup roller
Optional tray 3 (250-sheet or 500-sheet feeder)
Figure 34.
Sheet-feeder pickup and feed
PS2305: Top-of-page sensor (printer)
PS2001: 250-sheet feeder media sensor
PS2003: 500-sheet feeder media sensor
SL2001: 250-sheet feeder pickup solenoid
SL2002: 500-sheet feeder pickup solenoid
104 Theory of operation
ENWW
Media detection
The model for media detection is essentially the same for all three trays.The paper sensor levers
shown in the following figure detect the presence of media in the trays. If the sensor does not
detect any media, the formatter illuminates the display LED until media is added.
PS2305
PS2301
SL2002
(SL2001)
PS502
PS501
PS3908
PS503
PS1305
PS2003
(PS2001)
Figure 35.
Media-detection sensors
PS2305: Top-of-page sensor (printer)
PS2001: 250-sheet feeder media sensor
PS2003: 500-sheet feeder media sensor
SL2001: 250-sheet feeder pickup solenoid
SL2002: 500-sheet feeder pickup solenoid
PS502: Rear output bin sensor
PS501: Reversed paper sensor
PS1305: Tray 2 media sensor
PS503: Automatic duplex pickup paper sensor
PS3908: Tray 1 media sensor
PS2301: Delivery sensor
Media-size detection
The HP LaserJet 2300 printer does not contain a media-size detection mechanism; therefore,
the printer cannot detect the size of media stored in the trays. The printer detects the media size
by measuring the time from when the top-of-page sensor detects the leading edge of the page
until the trailing edge of the page clears the sensor.
ENWW
Chapter 5 Theory of operation 105
Jam detection
The following mechanisms detect the presence of media and paper-feed conditions:
●
top-of-page sensor (PS2305)
●
delivery sensor (PS2301)
●
reversed-paper sensor (PS501)
●
automatic duplexer pickup paper sensor (PS503)
The CPU detects a jam by checking for the presence of media through sensors against the
timing stored in the CPU.
If the CPU determines a jam, it stops the print operation and notifies the formatter of a jam.
Pickup sensors
Pickup delay jam
This printer performs retry control to readdress any pickup delay jam that the pickup error
causes. Pickup operation is conducted a maximum of twice at all pickup sources except for the
automatic duplex feed unit.
If the top-of-page sensor (PS2305) cannot detect the media leading edge within a specified
period of time (T) the printer performs the pickup operation again. If PS2305 cannot detect the
media leading edge within the specified period of time (T), a jam is indicated.
●
paper pickup from the tray1: T = approximately 2.5 seconds
●
paper pickup from the cassette: T = approximately 3.0 seconds
●
paper pickup from the paper feeder: T = approximately 4.4 seconds
●
paper pickup from the automatic duplexer feed unit: T = approximately 4.5 seconds
Pickup stationary jam
A. When the WAIT period starts—a pickup stationary jam is assessed if the top-of-page sensor
detects media when the WAIT period starts.
B. During media feeding—a pickup stationary jam is assessed if the top-of-page sensor
(PS2305) does not detect the trailing edge of the media within 3.8 seconds after detecting
the leading edge.
106 Theory of operation
ENWW
Delivery sensors
Delivery delay jam
A delivery delay jam is assessed if the media does not reach the delivery sensor (PS2301) within
a specified period of time (T) after the top-of-page sensor (PS2305) detects the leading edge.
●
paper 270 mm or longer: T = approximately 2.6 seconds
●
paper 200 mm to 270 mm: T = approximately 2.7 seconds
●
paper shorter than 200 mm: T = approximately 4.6 seconds
Delivery stationary jam
A. When the WAIT period starts—a delivery stationary jam is assessed if the delivery sensor
(PS2301) detects media when the WAIT period starts.
B. During media feeding—a delivery stationary jam is assessed if the delivery sensor (PS2301)
does not detect the trailing edge of the media within a specified period of time (T) after the
top-of-page sensor (PS2305) detects the trailing edge.
●
paper 200 mm or longer: T = approximately 2.7 seconds
●
paper shorter than 200 mm: T = approximately 5.2 seconds
C. When a pickup delay jam occurs—the printer enters the last rotation period to deliver the
jammed media. A delivery stationary jam is assessed if the delivery sensor (PS2301) does
not detect the trailing edge of the media within 8 seconds after the completion of the forced
laser emission.
D. During pressure-roller cleaning—a delivery stationary jam is assessed if the delivery sensor
(PS2301) does not detect the trailing edge of the media within 8 seconds after the 35th feed
operation.
Reversing sensors
Reversing delay jam
A reversing delay jam is assessed if the reversed paper sensor (PS501) does not detect the
leading edge of the media within 3.9 seconds after the reversing motor starts rotating.
Reversing stationary jam
A reversing stationary jam is assessed when the reversed paper sensor (PS501) detects media
after automatic duplexer pickup operation has been performed for about 0.77 seconds.
ENWW
Chapter 5 Theory of operation 107
Automatic duplexer sensors
Duplexer pickup delay jam
A duplexer pickup delay jam is assessed if the duplexer pickup paper sensor (PS503) does not
detect media within 4.9 seconds after the reversed paper sensor (PS501) detects the leading
edge.
Duplexer pickup stationary jam
A duplexer pickup stationary jam is assessed if the duplexer pickup paper sensor (PS503)
detects media after about 3.4 seconds has passed since the reversed paper sensor (PS501)
detected the trailing edge.
Paper-feed sensor
Jam detection for the paper feeders during the pickup and feed operations is same as that for the
printer. For jam detection, see page 106.
108 Theory of operation
ENWW
6
Removal and replacement
Chapter contents
Removal and replacement strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Required tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIMM cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top-cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left-side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 1 assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 1 pickup roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pickup sensor flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 1 separation pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 2 pickup roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 2 and 250-sheet feeder separation pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laser/scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laser/scanner plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-label reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drive assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flat, flexible cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine controller PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top-output-bin delivery assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registration-roller assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Feed belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENWW
111
111
112
113
113
114
115
116
119
120
121
124
125
126
130
130
132
133
136
139
140
141
143
144
145
147
148
151
152
153
158
159
162
169
172
174
175
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 109
Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
250-sheet feeder and 500-sheet feeder pickup roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
500-sheet feeder separation pad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
110 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Removal and replacement strategies
This chapter documents the removal and replacement of the field-replaceable units (FRUs) only.
Replace the parts in the reverse order of their removal. If replacement requires difficult or critical
installation procedures, the notes that are provided give detailed special instructions.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury, unplug the power cable from the power outlet before servicing the printer.
During troubleshooting, certain functional checks must be performed while power is supplied to
the product. However, the power supply should be disconnected during disassembly.
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from the laser/scanner
assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage eyes.
The clip gasket that is attached to the formatter's radio frequency interference (RFI) shield contains
nickel. Do not touch the clip gasket with your bare hands. Repair technicians should wear gloves
to handle this gasket. Be advised in accordance with European Union Directive 76/769/EEC that
ingesting water-soluble nickel salts can cause nausea, vomiting, and diarrhea.
The printer might have sharp sheet metal edges. Be careful to avoid these edges when you are
working on the printer.
CAUTION
The printer contains parts that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always service the
printer at an ESD-protected workstation or use an ESD mat.
To install a self-tapping screw, first turn it counterclockwise to align it with the existing thread
pattern, and then carefully turn it clockwise to tighten it. Do not overtighten. If a self-tapping screwhole becomes stripped, repair the screw-hole or replace the affected assembly.
Always remove the print cartridge before removing or replacing the assemblies and parts.
Note
Note the lengths, diameters, and locations of the screws. Be sure to use them in their original
locations during reassembly.
Note
Incorrectly routed or loose wire harnesses can interfere with other internal components and
become damaged or broken. Frayed or pinched harness wires can be difficult to find. When you
replace wire harnesses, always use the provided wire loops and wire-harness guides.
Required tools
The following tools are required used to remove and replace the assemblies that are described in
this chapter:
ENWW
●
Phillips #2 screwdriver with magnetic tip
●
small flatblade screwdriver
●
needle-nose pliers
●
ESD mat
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 111
Before you begin
1
Unplug the power and communications cables.
2
Lift the printer off of the optional tray (if installed).
3
Remove the print cartridge.
a Open the top door.
b Lift the print cartridge straight up and out of the printer.
Figure 36.
Removing the print cartridge
4
Figure 37.
Remove tray 2.
Removing tray 2
112 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Covers
I/O cover
1
Press two release buttons (callout 1) on the back of the I/O cover.
2
Rotate the back of the cover away from the printer to remove the cover.
2
1
Figure 38.
ENWW
Removing the I/O cover
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 113
Print server
1
Open or remove the I/O cover (see page 113).
2
Unscrew two thumb screws (callout 1).
3
Remove the print server by pulling it toward the back of the printer.
2
1
Figure 39.
Removing the print server
114 Removal and replacement
ENWW
DIMM cover
1
Remove the I/O cover (see page 113).
2
Release two tabs—one at the top of the printer (callout 1) and one inside the tray 2 cavity
(callout 2).
2
1
2
Figure 40.
ENWW
Removing the DIMM cover
3
Pull the cover toward the front of the printer to release the cover from the frame, and then lift
the cover away from the printer.
4
Remove the DIMMs from the printer.
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 115
Rear cover
1
Remove the following covers:
• I/O cover (see page 113)
• DIMM cover (page 115)
2
Open the rear output bin and then lift it to an angle that allows you to disengage two pins
(callout 1) on the rear guide, one at each side of the bin.
2
1
Figure 41.
Removing the rear cover (1 of 3)
116 Removal and replacement
ENWW
3
Lower the rear output bin to the work surface, and then remove two screws (callout 2) from
the rear cover.
2
Figure 42.
ENWW
Removing the rear cover (2 of 3)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 117
4
Lift up the rear output bin with one hand and then use a flatblade screwdriver to release two
tabs (callout 3)—one on each side of the rear cover—inside the tray 2 cavity.
2
3
Figure 43.
Removing the rear cover (3 of 3)
5
Lift the cover away from the printer.
118 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Front cover
1
Remove the following covers:
• I/O cover (see page 113)
• DIMM cover (page 115)
• rear cover (page 116)
2
Open the top door.
3
Open tray 1.
4
Remove two screws (callout 1) from the front cover.
2
1
Figure 44.
Removing the front cover
5
ENWW
Lift the cover straight up and away from the printer.
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 119
Control panel
1
Remove the following covers
• I/O cover (see page 113)
• DIMM cover (page 115)
• rear cover (page 116)
• front cover (page 119)
2
Remove three screws (callout 1) from the control panel.
3
Disconnect one connector (callout 2).
2
1
Figure 45.
2
Removing the control panel
4
Lift the control panel away from the printer.
Reinstall note
Make sure that the connector shown in callout 2 in figure 45 is reconnected correctly. If, after
reassembly, the control panel malfunctions, unplug this connector and then reconnect it.
120 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Top-cover assembly
1
Remove the following covers and assemblies:
• I/O cover (see page 113)
• DIMM cover (page 115)
• rear cover (page 116)
• front cover (page 119)
• control panel (page 120)
Figure 46.
ENWW
2
Open the top door.
3
Use needle nose pliers to pinch the tabs on the coupling and press the tabs through the hole
in the top-door arm.
4
Allow the coupling to fall into the printer.
Removing the top-cover assembly (1 of 3)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 121
5
Remove two screws (callout 1) from the top cover at the back of the printer.
2
1
Figure 47.
Removing the top-cover assembly (2 of 3)
122 Removal and replacement
ENWW
6
Use a flatblade screwdriver to release one tab (callout 2) at the left side of the top cover.
2
Figure 48.
Removing the top-cover assembly (3 of 3)
7
ENWW
Lift the cover off of the printer.
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 123
Left-side cover
Remove the following assemblies:
1
Remove the following covers and assemblies
• I/O cover (see page 113)
• DIMM cover (page 115)
• rear cover (page 116)
• front cover (page 119)
• control panel (page 120)
• top cover assembly (page 121)
2
Release one tab (callout 1).
3
Rotate the top of the left-side cover away from the printer and then lift the cover off of the
printer frame.
2
1
Figure 49.
Removing the left-side cover
124 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Power switch
1
Remove all of the covers and the control-panel assembly (see pages 113 through 124).
2
On the inside of the left-side cover, pinch two tabs (callout 1) together to release the spring
(callout 2).
3
After removing the spring, pinch the two tabs together and press them through the holes in
the left-side cover to release the power switch.
2
1
2
Figure 50.
ENWW
Removing the power switch
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 125
Tray 1 assembly
CAUTION
1
Remove all of the covers and the control-panel assembly (see pages 113 through 124).
2
Open tray 1.
3
Lift tray 1 slightly to align the notch (callout 1) in the tray 1 cover (callout 2) with the hinge
pins of the tray 1 hinges (callout 3).
4
Push the right tray 1 hinge to the left while pulling the tray 1 cover to the right to carefully
disengage the hinge pin from the tray 1 cover.
Do not pull the tray 1 cover to the right by pulling the notched portion of the tray 1 cover. The
notched portion of the cover bends or breaks easily.
5
Disengage the left tray 1 hinge (callout 4) from the tray 1 cover.
6
Close the tray 1 guide (callout 5).
2
1
2
3
2
5
2
2
4
Figure 51.
Removing the tray 1 assembly (1 of 4)
126 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Note
In figure 52, the tray 1 guide (callout 5; also shown as callout 5 in figure 51 on page 126) is shown
in its “closed” position.
7
Open the tray 1 cover, and then slide the tray 1 cover to the left to remove it from its pins
(callout 7).
2
5
2
6
Figure 52.
ENWW
Removing the tray 1 assembly (2 of 4)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 127
8
Disengage the right and left hinges from the tray 1 guide and then rotate each hinge down to
slide it off of its keyed hole (callout 7) in the printer.
2
7
Figure 53.
Removing the tray 1 assembly (3 of 4)
128 Removal and replacement
ENWW
9
Use needle-nose pliers to unhook two springs (callout 8)—one at each side of the printer
frame—and then lift the tray 1 guide away from the printer.
2
8
Figure 54.
ENWW
Removing the tray 1 assembly (4 of 4)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 129
Internal assemblies
Tray 1 pickup roller
1
Remove the following covers
• I/O cover (see page 113)
• DIMM cover (page 115)
• rear cover (page 116)
• front cover (page 119)
Figure 55.
2
Use a flatblade screwdriver to release the tab on the cam at the right side of the pickup roller.
3
Slide the cam and the white, plastic roller toward the right side of the printer to release the
pickup roller.
Removing the tray 1 pickup roller (1 of 2)
130 Removal and replacement
ENWW
4
Figure 56.
ENWW
Rotate the pickup roller and lift it off of the pickup roller shaft.
Removing the tray 1 pickup roller (2 of 2)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 131
Pickup sensor flag
Figure 57.
1
Remove all of the covers and the control-panel assembly (see pages 113 through 124).
2
Use a flatblade screwdriver to pry up the sensor flag.
3
Before you remove the pickup sensor flag, examine the position of the torsion spring and the
motion of the sensor flag. At reinstallation, the spring must be reinstalled correctly to ensure
that the flag’s motion is correct.
Removing the pickup sensor flag
CAUTION
4
Be very careful not to break the
part that holds the pickup sensor
flag in place.
Rotate the pickup sensor flag and slide the flag to the left, clearing the hole in the printer
frame.
132 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Tray 1 separation pad
1
Remove the following covers and assemblies
• all covers and the control-panel assembly (see pages 113 through 124)
• tray 1 assembly (page 126)
2
Remove one screw (callout 1) from the tray 1 separation-pad assembly.
2
1
Figure 58.
ENWW
Removing the tray 1 separation pad (1 of 3)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 133
3
Figure 59.
Pull the tray 1 separation-pad assembly out of the printer.
Removing the tray 1 separation pad (2 of 3)
134 Removal and replacement
ENWW
4
Figure 60.
ENWW
Use a flatblade screwdriver to pry the separation pad off of the assembly.
Removing the tray 1 separation pad (3 of 3)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 135
Tray 2 pickup roller
1
Remove tray 2 and place the printer so that it rests on its rear cover.
2
Use a flatblade screwdriver to release the tab on the white, plastic lever (callout 1) at the left
side of the tray 2 pickup roller, and then rotate the lever to a position perpendicular to its
original position.
2
1
Figure 61.
Removing the tray 2 pickup roller (1 of 3)
136 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Figure 62.
ENWW
3
Slide the lever toward the left side of the printer and through the hole to remove it.
4
Slide the pickup roller toward the left side of the printer.
Removing the tray 2 pickup roller (2 of 3)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 137
5
Use a flatblade screwdriver to release the tab on the lever (callout 2) at the right side of the
pickup roller
6
Rotate the lever and slide it toward the right side of the printer in the same manner as the
lever on the left side. Sliding the right-side lever releases the pickup roller shaft.
2
Figure 63.
Removing the tray 2 pickup roller (3 of 3)
7
Lift the pickup roller out of the printer.
138 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Tray 2 and 250-sheet feeder separation pad
1
Slide tray 2 or the media tray of a 250-sheet feeder out of the printer.
2
Press down the lift plate to lock it in place.
3
Use a flatblade screwdriver to press two tabs (callout 2), releasing the separation pad.
4
Slide the separation pad straight up and out of the tray.
2
2
1
Figure 64.
ENWW
Removing the tray 2 and 250-sheet feeder separation pad
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 139
Fan
1
Remove all of the covers and the control-panel assembly (see pages 113 through 124).
2
Unplug the fan cable connector (callout 1) from the engine controller PCA.
3
Remove two screws (callout 2) from the fan.
2
1
2
Figure 65.
Removing the fan
4
Unthread the fan cable from the cable harness, and then lift the fan away from the printer.
140 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Fuser
1
Remove the following covers:
• I/O cover (see page 113)
• DIMM cover (page 115)
• rear cover (page 116)
2
Remove two screws (callout 1) from the fuser cover and then lift the fuser cover away from
the printer.
2
1
Figure 66.
ENWW
Removing the fuser (1 of 2)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 141
3
Use a small flatblade screwdriver to disengage the tab on one connector (callout 2) and then
unplug the connector.
4
Unplug two connectors (callout 3).
5
Remove two screws (callout 4 and 5).
2
5
2
2
4
Figure 67.
2
3
Removing the fuser (2 of 2)
6
Pull the fuser straight out and away from the printer.
142 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Laser/scanner
1
Remove all of the covers and the control-panel assembly (see pages 113 through 124).
2
Unplug one cable connector (callout 1) from the engine controller PCA.
3
Unplug the flat, flexible cable (callout 2) from the laser/scanner.
4
Remove four screws (callout 3).
2
2
1
2
3
Figure 68.
Removing the laser/scanner
5
Lift the laser/scanner off of the laser/scanner plate.
Reinstall note
Reattaching the flat, flexible cable to the laser/scanner before reseating the laser/scanner might
be easier than reattaching it afterwards.
ENWW
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 143
Laser/scanner plate
1
Remove all of the covers and the control-panel assembly (see pages 113 through 124).
2
Unplug the fan connector (callout 1; see callout 1 on page 140 for another view of the fan
connector) from the engine controller PCA and then unwind the fan cable from the cable
holders that are on top of the laser/scanner plate.
3
Unplug the flat, flexible cable (callout 2) from the laser/scanner.
4
Unplug two connectors (callout 3) from the engine controller PCA.
5
Remove one grounding screw (callout 4).
6
Remove four screws (callout 5), and then lift the laser/scanner plate out of the printer.
2
3
2
4
2
5
2
2
1
Figure 69.
Removing the e-label reader (1 of 3)
144 Removal and replacement
ENWW
E-label reader
Note
1
Remove all of the covers and the control-panel assembly (see pages 113 through 124).
2
Remove the laser/scanner plate (page 144).
3
Unwind the e-label reader cable (callout 5) from the cable holders that are on top of the
laser/scanner plate.
Examine the cable routing. Make sure that you loop the cable around the vertical cable holder
(callout 6) when you reinstall the e-label reader.
2
5
2
6
Figure 70.
ENWW
Removing the e-label reader (2 of 3)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 145
4
Figure 71.
Turn the laser/scanner plate over and then use a flatblade screwdriver to pry the e-label
reader out of its assembly on the laser/scanner plate.
Removing the e-label reader (3 of 3)
146 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Formatter
1
Remove the following covers and assemblies:
• I/O cover (see page 113)
• DIMM cover (page 115)
• rear cover (page 116)
• front cover (page 119)
• control panel (page 120)
• top cover assembly (page 121)
2
Use a flatblade screwdriver to press down the tab at the top of one connector (callout 1) and
then unplug the connector.
3
Unplug the flat, flexible cable (callout 2) from the formatter.
4
Remove five screws (callout 3).
2
2
1
Figure 72.
2
3
Removing the formatter
5
Lift the formatter off of the printer.
Reinstall note
Use the locator pin at the lower edge of the formatter plate (toward the back of the printer) to
place the plate correctly.
ENWW
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 147
Drive assembly
1
Remove the following covers and assemblies:
• I/O cover (see page 113)
• DIMM cover (page 115)
• rear cover (page 116)
• front cover (page 119)
• control panel (page 120)
• top cover assembly (page 121)
• formatter (page 147)
2
Unplug two connectors (callout 1).
3
Unplug one flat, flexible cable (callout 2) from the engine controller PCA.
4
Remove one grounding screw (callout 3).
2
1
2
2
3
Figure 73.
Removing the drive assembly (1 of 3)
148 Removal and replacement
ENWW
5
Remove eight screws (callout 4).
2
4
2
5
Figure 74.
Removing the drive assembly (2 of 3)
Reinstall note
Before replacing the screws, make sure that the connector (callout 5) is routed below the drive
assembly plate. Do not thread the cable through the holes in the plate.
ENWW
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 149
6
Figure 75.
Guide the cables through the hole in the printer frame and then gently rotate the top of the
drive assembly away from the printer.
Removing the drive assembly (3 of 3)
7
Lift the assembly away from the printer.
150 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Main motor
1
Remove the following covers and assemblies:
• I/O cover (see page 113)
• DIMM cover (page 115)
• rear cover (page 116)
• front cover (page 119)
• control panel (page 120)
• top cover assembly (page 121)
• formatter (page 147)
• drive assembly (page 148)
2
Remove three screws (callout 1).
3
Lift the main motor off of the drive assembly.
2
1
Figure 76.
ENWW
Removing the main motor
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 151
Flat, flexible cable
1
Remove the following covers and assemblies:
• I/O cover (see page 113)
• DIMM cover (page 115)
• rear cover (page 116)
• front cover (page 119)
• control panel (page 120)
• top cover assembly (page 121)
• formatter (page 147)
Note
2
Use a flatblade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 1) on the cable guide.
3
Slide the guide toward the back of the printer and then lift the guide and the flat, flexible cable
off of the drive assembly plate.
The flat, flexible cable is pre-folded to match the locations of its connectors. To take advantage of
the folds, make sure that the cable is situated correctly before reinstalling the cable guide.
2
1
Figure 77.
Removing the flat, flexible cable
152 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Engine controller PCA
1
Remove the following covers and assemblies:
• I/O cover (see page 113)
• DIMM cover (page 115)
• rear cover (page 116)
• front cover (page 119)
• control panel (page 120)
• top cover assembly (page 121)
• formatter (page 147)
• drive assembly (page 148)
2
Note
Use a flatblade screwdriver to pry one connector (callout 1) off of the switch (callout 2).
After the connector and the switch are separated, the switch can easily fall out of its place in the
printer frame. Make sure that you do not lose the switch.
2
1
2
Figure 78.
ENWW
Removing the engine controller PCA (1 of 5)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 153
3
Unplug two connectors (callout 3).
4
Unplug the flat, flexible cable (callout 4) from the laser/scanner.
2
3
Figure 79.
2
4
Removing the engine controller PCA (2 of 5)
154 Removal and replacement
ENWW
5
Remove two screws (callouts 5 and 6; callout 6 indicates a grounding screw).
6
Rotate the bottom of the assembly away from the printer to clear two tabs (callout 7) at the
top of the assembly and then rotate the top of the assembly away from the printer.
2
7
2
5
Figure 80.
2
6
Removing the engine controller PCA (3 of 5)
Reinstall note
Make sure that you insert the two tabs (callout 7 in figure 80) into the slots in the printer frame
before replacing the screws.
ENWW
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 155
7
Figure 81.
Unplug the remaining four connectors and the flat, flexible cable from the engine controller
PCA.
Removing the engine controller PCA (4 of 5)
156 Removal and replacement
ENWW
8
Remove one screw (callout 7) from the engine controller PCA.
2
7
Figure 82.
Removing the engine controller PCA (5 of 5)
9
ENWW
Lift the engine controller PCA off of the metal plate.
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 157
Solenoid
The three solenoids can be removed by removing one screw from each solenoid. Figure 83
shows each of the solenoids:
●
tray 1 pickup solenoid (callout 1)
●
tray 2 pickup solenoid (callout 2)
●
automatic duplexer solenoid (callout 3)
1
Remove the following covers and assemblies:
• I/O cover (see page 113)
• DIMM cover (page 115)
• rear cover (page 116)
• front cover (page 119)
• control panel (page 120)
• top cover assembly (page 121)
• formatter (page 147)
• drive assembly (page 148)
• engine controller PCA
2
Note
Remove one screw and then lift the solenoid out of the printer.
Pay close attention to the cable routing for the solenoid as you remove it.
2
1
2
1
2
2
3
2
Figure 83.
Removing the solenoid
158 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Access plate
1
Remove the following covers and assemblies:
• I/O cover (see page 113)
• DIMM cover (page 115)
• rear cover (page 116)
• front cover (page 119)
• control panel (page 120)
• top cover assembly (page 121)
• formatter (page 147)
• drive assembly (page 148)
2
Turn the printer so that the bottom of the printer faces up.
3
Pull the green access-plate release lever (callout 1) and then lift up the access plate slightly.
2
1
Figure 84.
ENWW
Removing the access plate (1 of 3)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 159
4
Press the spring (callout 2) while rotating the access plate to release the access plate from
the printer frame.
2
Figure 85.
Removing the access plate (2 of 3)
160 Removal and replacement
ENWW
5
Lift one corner of the access plate off of the pin (callout 3) and then slide the access plate off
of the pin (callout 4) at the opposite side.
2
3
Figure 86.
ENWW
2
4
Removing the access plate (3 of 3)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 161
Power supply
1
Remove the following covers and assemblies:
• I/O cover (see page 113)
• DIMM cover (page 115)
• rear cover (page 116)
• front cover (page 119)
• control panel (page 120)
• top cover assembly (page 121)
• formatter (page 147)
• drive assembly (page 148)
• access plate (page 159)
2
Remove two screws (callout 1) from the media guide and then lift the media guide off of the
bottom plate.
2
1
Figure 87.
Removing the power supply (1 of 6)
162 Removal and replacement
ENWW
3
Note
Use a small, flatblade screwdriver to release the tab on one connector (callout 2) and then
unplug the connector.
In figure 88, the fuser has been removed. To remove the power supply from a printer in which the
fuser is present, see page 142 for instructions to unplug the three additional connectors.
2
Figure 88.
ENWW
Removing the power supply (2 of 6)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 163
Note
4
Remove four screws (callout 3) from the bottom plate.
5
Remove one screw (callout 4) from the grounding plate.
If the fuser has already been removed, then the grounding plate might fall off of the printer when
the screw is removed from the grounding plate.
2
3
2
4
Figure 89.
Removing the power supply (3 of 6)
164 Removal and replacement
ENWW
6
Lift the bottom plate slightly to reveal the power-supply PCA.
7
Release the tab on one connector (callout 5) and then unplug the connector.
2
5
Figure 90.
ENWW
Removing the power supply (4 of 6)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 165
8
Remove four screws (callout 6) from the power-supply PCA.
2
6
Figure 91.
Removing the power supply (5 of 6)
166 Removal and replacement
ENWW
9
Use needle-nose pliers to pinch the plastic pin (callout 7) and lift the power-supply PCA off of
the bottom plate.
2
7
Figure 92.
ENWW
Removing the power supply (6 of 6)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 167
Reinstall notes
Before reinstalling the power-supply PCA, make sure that the six spring-contacts (callout 7) are
in place.
2
7
Figure 93.
Power-supply PCA spring-contacts
168 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Top-output-bin delivery assembly
1
Remove the following covers and assemblies:
• all covers and the control-panel assembly (see pages 113 through 124)
• formatter (page 147)
• drive assembly (page 148)
2
Figure 94.
ENWW
Use a flatblade screwdriver to press the tab on the gear at the right side of the printer, and
then slide the gear off of its shaft.
Removing the top-output-bin-delivery assembly (1 of 3)
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 169
3
Figure 95.
Removing the top-output-bin delivery assembly (2 of 3)
4
CAUTION
Separate the tabs that secure the bushing to the frame at the left side of the printer.
Slide the shaft toward the left side of the printer to clear the hole in the printer frame at the
right side.
Lifting the shaft before the shaft clears the hole at the right side of the printer frame can damage
the shaft.
5
Lift the shaft out of the printer.
170 Removal and replacement
ENWW
6
Note
Each roller holder should have a spring attached. Make sure that the springs are in place before
reinstalling a roller holder.
7
Figure 96.
To remove the small rollers, rotate the roller holders toward the back of the printer until the
hinges are clear of obstruction, and then lift the holders off of the printer.
Use a flatblade screwdriver to pry the small rollers out of the holders.
Removing the top-output-bin delivery assembly (3 of 3)
Reinstall note
Two types of small roller holders are installed on the printer, and they are not interchangeable.
Make sure you replace the roller holders in their correct positions on the printer.
ENWW
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 171
Registration-roller assembly
1
Remove all of the covers and the control-panel assembly (see pages 113 through 124).
2
Remove six screws (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 97.
Removing the registration-roller assembly (1 of 2)
172 Removal and replacement
ENWW
3
Figure 98.
Removing the registration-roller assembly (2 of 2)
4
ENWW
Use a flatblade screwdriver to press the tab on the registration roller gear at the right side of
the printer, and then slide the gear off of the shaft.
Remove the assembly from the printer by lifting the left side of the assembly up and then
sliding the assembly toward the left side of the printer so that the shaft clears the hole in the
printer frame.
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 173
Transfer roller
Figure 99.
1
Remove all of the covers and the control-panel assembly (see pages 113 through 124).
2
Remove the laser/scanner plate (page 144).
3
Use needle-nose pliers to pinch the tabs on the transfer roller bushings, one at each side of
the transfer roller.
Removing the transfer roller
4
Lift the transfer roller out of the printer.
Reinstall note
The spring at the left side of the transfer roller should remain attached to the bushing. Before you
reinstall the roller, make sure that the spring is attached. The spring at the right side should
remain in the printer.
174 Removal and replacement
ENWW
Feed belts
Note
1
Remove all of the covers and the control-panel assembly (see pages 113 through 124).
2
Remove the laser/scanner plate (page 144).
3
Use a flatblade screwdriver to pry the left end of the paper feed shaft (callout 1) out of the
printer.
4
Slide the paper-feed shaft to the left to disengage the right end of the shaft.
5
When the paper-feed shaft is free from its position in the printer, lift the pulleys (callout 2) and
slide the feed belts off of the paper-feed shaft.
After removing the feed belts, the pulleys can fall out of the printer. Make sure that you don’t lose
any of the pulleys.
2
1
2
Figure 100.
ENWW
Removing the feed belts
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 175
Trays
250-sheet feeder and 500-sheet feeder pickup roller
Note
Procedures for removing the pickup roller from a 250-sheet feeder are identical to the procedures
for removing the pickup roller from a 500-sheet feeder. In the photographs for these procedures,
a 500-sheet feeder is shown.
1
Lift the printer off of the feeder and then remove all of the paper from the feeder.
2
Press down the lift plate and pull the tray out of the feeder.
3
Turn the feeder so that it rests on its back side.
4
Insert the flatblade screwdriver into the slot on the right roller-shaft cover (callout 1) and then
pry the cover off of the feeder.
5
Insert the flatblade screwdriver into the slot (callout 2) on the left roller-shaft cover and then
pry the cover off of the feeder.
2
1
2
Figure 101.
Removing the pickup roller from a 250-sheet or 500-sheet feeder (1 of 2)
176 Removal and replacement
ENWW
6
Use the flatblade screwdriver to disengage the white, plastic lever (callout 3), and then rotate
the tab towards the front of the tray to release the roller shaft.
7
Slide the lever toward the left side of the tray to remove it. Also slide the pickup roller shaft
toward the left side of the tray.
2
3
Figure 102.
ENWW
Removing the pickup roller from a 250-sheet or 500-sheet feeder (2 of 2)
8
Rotate the plastic lever on the right side of the pickup roller shaft and then slide the lever
toward the right side of the tray.
9
When the right-side lever clears the pickup roller shaft, lift up the pickup roller to remove it.
Chapter 6 Removal and replacement 177
500-sheet feeder separation pad
Note
Note
See page 139 for procedures for removing the separation pad from a 250-sheet feeder.
1
Slide the media tray out of the 500-sheet feeder and remove media from the feeder.
2
Press down the lift plate (callout 1)
The lift plate on 500-sheet feeders does not lock.
3
Use a flatblade screwdriver to release two tabs (callout 2) on the separation pad.
4
Slide the separation pad straight up and off of the feeder.
2
2
1
Figure 103.
Removing the 500-sheet feeder separation pad
178 Removal and replacement
ENWW
7
Troubleshooting
Chapter contents
Troubleshooting process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preliminary operating checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic fault isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting process flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting with control-panel messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the printer online Help system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interpreting control-panel messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media-handling problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing a configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing a Jetdirect configuration page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing a usage page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing a supplies status page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing an engine test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jam troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jam causes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical jam locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper-access area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray 2 or tray 3 input area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print-cartridge area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image-formation troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Image-defect tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Determine the problem source: print media or printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolate a paper path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolate a media brand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Isolate a media type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Evaluate media use practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Evaluate environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communication troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repetitive defect ruler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Half-self-test functional check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing a self test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing a paper path test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Drum-rotation functional check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENWW
180
180
180
182
183
184
184
186
198
198
199
200
200
201
203
204
204
205
206
207
208
209
211
217
217
217
218
219
223
223
225
226
226
227
228
228
228
229
230
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 179
Troubleshooting process
Preliminary operating checks
Make sure that the following conditions are met before troubleshooting a specific printer problem:
Note
●
The printer is plugged in and power is delivered to the outlet as specified on the power rating
label. (See figure 2 on page 19 for a sample identification label and see page 20 for power
specifications.)
●
The selected tray contains media that has been correctly loaded. (See the getting started
guide for information about loading trays.)
●
The print cartridge is installed correctly. (See the getting started guide for information about
installing print cartridges.)
●
The printer is receiving maintenance on a regular basis. (See chapter 4 for information about
maintaining the printer.)
●
Any I/O devices are correctly installed. (See the getting started guide for information about
setting up the printer.)
●
The customer is using acceptable print media. (See chapter 1 for information about media.)
●
The printer is positioned on a solid, level surface. (See the getting started guide for
information about setting up the printer.)
●
The line voltage does not vary more than 10 percent from the nominal rated value specified
on the power rating label. (See figure 2 on page 19 for a sample identification label and see
page 20 for power specifications.)
●
The operating environment for the printer is within the temperature and humidity
specifications. (See page 21 for information about the operating environment.)
●
The printer is never exposed to ammonia fumes such as those produced by diazo copiers or
office cleaning materials. (See the getting started guide for information about setting up the
printer.)
●
The printer is not exposed to direct sunlight. (See the getting started guide for information
about setting up the printer.)
●
Non-HP components (such as refilled print cartridges, font cartridges, and memory boards)
are removed from the printer.
Sudden changes in the printer’s environment can cause image defects and media-handling
problems. Always make sure the printer is not exposed to direct sunlight or to heating or cooling
vents. Allow time for the printer and media to acclimate whenever changing environments (for
example, moving from a cold environment to a warm one). Acclimation can take anywhere from 3
to 24 hours depending on the ambient conditions.
Basic fault isolation
The troubleshooting process is a systematic approach that first addresses the major problems
first and then other problems to discover the causes for printer malfunctions and errors. The
"Troubleshooting process flow" page 182 illustrates the major steps for troubleshooting the
printing system. Each heading depicts a major troubleshooting step. A “YES” answer to the
questions allows troubleshooting to proceed to the next major step.
A “NO” answer indicates that additional testing and correction is needed. Proceed to the
referenced location in the chapter and follow the directions there. After completing the additional
testing and correcting the problem, proceed to the next major step.
Note
It is important to always follow this process in sequence. Failure to do so can result in increased
repair time, difficulty, and expense.
180 Troubleshooting
ENWW
This list describes the basic questions for the customer to answer and the corresponding
troubleshooting section to help quickly define the problem(s).
“Power-on” on
page 183
Does the printer perform the initialization and power-on sequence?
This section contains the procedures for correcting power supply problems.
“Troubleshooting with Does the control-panel message indicate an error condition?
control-panel
messages” on
This section contains the procedures for clearing control panel messages.
page 184
ENWW
“Media-handling
problems” on
page 198
Is it possible to print a test page?
“Image-formation
troubleshooting” on
page 209
Does the print quality meet the customer’s expectations?
“Media
troubleshooting” on
page 217
This section contains information about how to determine print-media problems
and correct them.
“Communication
troubleshooting” on
page 225
Can the customer print from the host system successfully?
This section contains information about troubleshooting paper-path and print-media
problems and contains the procedures for printing the information pages and
evaluating and correcting the printer’s configuration.
This section contains print cartridge checks, information about EconoMode, image
defect examples, and the repetitive-defect ruler.
This section describes how to determine whether the printer is communicating
correctly with the host system.
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 181
Troubleshooting process flow
Fix fan motor
Power-on
verification
Checks OK?
Fix control panel
Fix power-on
problem
NO
YES
Interpret the
Troubleshooting
control panel
with control
message
panel messages
OK?
NO
Fix indicated
problem
YES
Media-handling
problems
Can you print
a test page? NO
See
paperpath
troubleshooting
Fix
paperpath
problem
Test pages
Fix
indicated
problem
Compare
information
page to
a sample
Fix problem
YES
Evaluate
configuration
pages
OK?
NO
Investigate
potential
media
problems
YES
Imageformation
troubleshooting
OK?
NO
YES
Communication
Evaluate the
troubleshooting
Jetdirect
Can you print
page
from host
NO
system?
YES
Print
from LPT 1
Network
administration
required
End
Figure 104.
Troubleshooting process flow
182 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Power-on
It is important to have the printer control panel functional as soon as possible in the
troubleshooting process so that the printer’s diagnostics can assist in locating printing errors.
Follow these steps to pinpoint power problems quickly.
Step 1 Verify that the printer is plugged in to a reliable power source and the power switch is
on.
Step 2 Verify that the fan and motors rotate.
Step 3 Verify that the formatter cables are connected correctly.
Step 4 Verify that the control panel connectors are connected.
Step 5 Verify that the DIMM cover is installed correctly.
Step 6 Verify that all connections to the power supply assembly are intact and the assembly
is not damaged. If the connections are damaged, replace them.
Step 7 Check that connections to the engine controller assembly are intact and not
damaged. If necessary, replace the engine controller assembly.
ENWW
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 183
Troubleshooting with control-panel messages
Printer messages appear on the printer control panel display to relay the normal status of the
printer (such as Processing job) or an error condition (such as CLOSE FRONT DOOR) that needs
attention. “Interpreting control-panel messages” on page 186 lists the most common messages
that require attention or that might raise questions. Messages are listed in alphabetical order
first, with numeric messages at the end of the list.
Using the printer online Help system
This printer features an online Help system on the control panel that provides instructions for
resolving most printer errors. Certain control panel messages alternate with instructions about
gaining access to the online Help system.
Whenever a message alternates with FOR HELP PRESS ?, press (HELP) to view the help and
(DOWN arrow) to scroll through the message.
use
(UP arrow) and
To exit the online Help system, press
see “Control panel” on page 52.
(HELP). For more information on control panel features,
Resolving persistent messages
Some messages (for example, requests to load a tray or a message that a previous print job is
still in the printer memory) allow you to press
(SELECT) to print, or to press CANCEL JOB to clear
the job and eliminate the message.
If a message persists after performing all of the recommended actions, contact an HP-authorized
service or support provider. (See “Ordering parts and supplies and getting support” on page 242
or go to http://www.hp.com/support/lj2300.)
184 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Troubleshooting the control-panel display
Try to fix common problems before replacing the control-panel display.
No display. If power-on is normal, but the control panel does not work, then try disconnecting
and then reconnecting the control panel connectors.
Poor display. If the control panel is working, but the display is illegible or shows poor contrast,
then check the contrast label (callout 1) on the back of the control panel.
2
1
Figure 105.
Control panel contrast label
The contrast label contains a number that corresponds to an optimum display-brightness setting.
Change the brightness setting in the control-panel menus to the number shown on the label (see
page 65).
If the control panel display is so poor that it is impossible to use the control-panel menus, then
change the brightness after using a “bootup” key-sequence.
To use the “bootup” key-sequence
ENWW
1
Turn the printer off.
2
Hold the BACK button down and turn on the printer. Continue to hold the BACK button until all
three LEDs are lit.
3
Press
(SELECT) to enter the control panel contrast settings.
4
Press
(SELECT) to advance to the LCD set.
5
Press
(SELECT) to advance to the brightness settings.
6
Use the
7
Press
(UP arrow) or
(DOWN arrow) to scroll through the numbered settings.
(SELECT) to save the setting.
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 185
Interpreting control-panel messages
Message
Description
Recommended action
Access denied
menus locked
The printer control panel function
you are trying to use has been
locked to prevent unauthorized
access.
See your network administrator.
Canceling...
[JOBNAME]
The printer is canceling a job. The
message continues while the job is
stopped, the paper path is cleared,
and any remaining incoming data
on the active data channel is
received and discarded.
No action necessary.
CANNOT DUPLEX
CLOSE REAR BIN
The printer is unable to print a
duplexed print job because the rear
bin is open.
Shut the rear bin door.
CANNOT DUPLEX
CLOSE REAR BIN
alternates with
CANNOT DUPLEX
CHECK PAPER
The printer is unable to print a
duplexed print job because either
the rear bin is open or the engine
detects a size that cannot be
duplexed.
Shut the rear bin door or load paper
of the correct size.
Cartridge installed
This message appears for
approximately 10 seconds after you
install a new, genuine HP cartridge.
No action necessary.
CARTRIDGE FAILURE
For help press
alternates with
RETURN FOR
REPLACEMENT
The cartridge is inserted and the
shipping protection strip cannot be
fully removed.
Return the cartridge for
replacement and replace the
cartridge.
Checking paper path
The printer is checking for possible
jams or paper that was not cleared
from the printer.
No action necessary.
Checking printer
The printer is checking for possible
jams or paper that was not cleared
from the printer.
No action necessary.
CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT
AVAILABLE
alternates with
The printer received a request for a
personality (printer language) that
does not exist in the printer. The
print job is canceled.
Print the job using a printer driver
for a different printer language, or
add the requested language to the
printer (if available).
To see a list of available
personalities, print a configuration
page. (See “Printing a configuration
page” on page 198.)
Clearing paper path
The printer jammed or the printer
was turned on and media was
detected in a wrong location. The
printer is automatically attempting to
eject the pages.
Wait for the printer to finish trying to
clear the pages. If it cannot, a jam
message appears on the control
panel display.
Cleaning...
The cleaning page is being
processed.
No action necessary.
Clearing event log
The printer is clearing the event log. No action necessary.
CLOSE TOP COVER
The printer detects that the top
cover is not closed.
To continue press
186 Troubleshooting
Close the top cover.
ENWW
Message
Description
Recommended action
Creating... CLEANING
PAGE
The printer is generating a cleaning
page.
No action necessary.
DATA RECEIVED
One of the following conditions
exists:
●
The printer received data and is
waiting for a form feed.
●
The printer is paused and there
is a job waiting to print.
No action necessary unless the
printer is paused.
If the printer is paused, the user can
press PAUSE/RESUME to process the
print job.
Deleting... <JOB NAME>
The printer is deleting the stored
print job.
No action necessary.
Event log empty
You are attempting to view an empty
event log by selecting SHOW EVENT
LOG from the control panel.
No action necessary.
[FS] FILE OPERATION
FAILED
The printer received a PJL file
system command that attempted to
perform an illogical operation, such
as downloading a file to a nonexistent directory.
(SELECT button) to clear
Press
the error.
[FS] IS WRITE PROTECTED
The file system device is protected,
and the printer cannot write new
files to it.
Press
(SELECT button) to clear
the error.
Incorrect
The user entered the wrong PIN.
Wait for printer to return to previous
screen, re-enter PIN, and press
(SELECT button).
Initializing...
This message appears when the
printer is turned on.
No action necessary.
Initializing permanent
storage.
This message appears when the
printer is turned on and begins to
initialize the permanent storage.
No action necessary.
INSTALL CARTRIDGE
alternates with
The print cartridge is missing and
must be reinstalled for printing to
continue.
Replace or correctly reinstall the
print cartridge.
LOAD TRAY [XX]
[TYPE] [SIZE]
The tray that is indicated is
configured for a specific type and
size of media needed by a print job,
but either the tray is empty or the
tray is not closed correctly. All other
trays are also empty.
Load the requested media in the
tray that is indicated. If there is
media in the tray, close the tray
correctly and press PAUSE/RESUME.
LOAD TRAY [XX]
[TYPE] [SIZE]
alternates with
A job is sent that requires a specific
type and size that is not available in
the tray that is indicated.
For help press
To use another
tray press
or
For help press
Perform one of these steps:
Load the requested media into
the indicated tray and press
(SELECT button).
●
Press
to use a type and
size that are available in
another tray.
●
or
To continue press
ENWW
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 187
Message
Description
Recommended action
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
alternates with
The printer is waiting for media to
be loaded in tray 1 for manual feed.
●
To use another
tray press
or
For help press
Perform one of these steps:
Load the requested media into
the tray 1 and press
(SELECT button).
●
Press
(SELECT button) to
use a type and size that are
available in another tray.
or
To continue press
No job to cancel
The CANCEL JOB button was
pressed, but there is no active job or
buffered data to cancel.
The message is displayed for
approximately 2 seconds before the
printer returns to the ready state.
No action necessary.
NON HP CARTRIDGE
DETECTED
A new cartridge has been installed
and the printer has determined that
the cartridge is not made by HP.
No action necessary.
This message appears when the
Make sure that you have a new
cartridge ready (see “Ordering parts
and supplies and getting support”
on page 242).
ORDER CARTRIDGE
LESS THAN [XXXX] PAGES
CARTRIDGE LOW setting in the
System Setup submenu is set to
CONTINUE and the cartridge has
approximately 8 percent of its toner
remaining.
188 Troubleshooting
Paused
alternates with
To return to ready
press RESUME key
The printer is paused but continues
to receive data until the memory is
full. The printer is not experiencing
an error.
Press Pause/Resume.
Performing... PAPER PATH
TEST
This message appears when the
printer tests the paper path.
No action necessary.
Please wait
The printer is busy.
No action necessary.
Powersave on
The printer is in Powersave mode.
Any key press, error condition, or
receipt of printable data clears this
message.
Printing... <X>
This message appears when the
printer is printing. The variable <X>
can represent any of the following:
●
CONFIGURATION
●
EVENT LOG
●
FILE DIRECTORY
●
FONT LIST
●
MENU MAP
●
REGISTRATION PAGE
●
SUPPLIES STATUS
●
USAGE PAGE
No action necessary.
Processing duplex job
The printer is printing a duplex job.
No action necessary.
Processing... <JOB NAME>
The printer is processing the current
job but has not begun to transfer
pages.
No action necessary.
ENWW
Message
Description
Recommended action
Processing... <JOB NAME>
copy <X> of <Y>
The printer is processing the current
job. The message indicates that
copy number X of the total number
of copies (Y) is currently being
processed.
No action necessary.
Processing... <JOB NAME>
from tray [XX]
The printer is processing the current
job and has begun to transfer
pages.
No action necessary.
Ready
The printer is online and ready for
data and no status or device
attendance messages are pending.
No action necessary.
Ready Diagnostics mode
The printer is online and ready for
data.
No action necessary.
REPLACE CARTRIDGE
The cartridge has reached the “out”
level and CARTRIDGE OUT is set to
CONTINUE in the menus. Printing
continues until the drum life reaches
zero.
If CARTRIDGE OUT is set to STOP, this
message becomes an error and
printing does not continue until the
menu item CARTRIDGE OUT is set to
CONTINUE.
Replace the cartridge.
Request accepted please
wait
A request to print an internal page
has been accepted, but cannot be
printed now. The user must wait for
the current job to finish printing
before the internal page prints.
No action necessary.
Resetting factory
settings
The printer is executing a RESTORE
FACTORY SETTINGS command and a
cold reset.
No action necessary.
Restoring...
The printer is executing one of the
following commands.
●
RESTORE LAST SAVED STATE
●
RESTORE PRINT MODES
●
RESTORE OPTIMIZATION
●
RESTORE COLOR VALUES
No action necessary.
SIZE MISMATCH
TRAY [XX]= [SIZE]
alternates with
Ready
For help press
The tray indicated is loaded with a
different size of paper than the size
configured for the tray.
Load the tray with the size
configured for the tray.
Make sure that the guides are
positioned correctly in the tray, and
then make sure that the switch in
the tray is set correctly to Custom or
Standard.
TRAY [XX]
[TYPE] [SIZE]
A tray is closed, but the user did not
change the position switch when the
tray was opened and closed.
User can select appropriate size or
type.
TRAY [XX] EMPTY
The tray is out of media.
Load paper in the empty tray to
clear the message.
If you do not load the specified tray,
the printer continues printing from
the next available tray with the same
paper size and type, and the
message continues to appear.
[TYPE] [SIZE]
alternates with
Ready
For menus press
ENWW
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 189
Message
Description
Recommended action
TYPE MISMATCH
TRAY [XX]=[TYPE]
alternates with
Ready
The system detected a different
type of media from the type
specified for the tray in the paper
path coming from tray XX.
1
2
For help press
3
4
The printer did not detect the type
and size of media requested. The
message shows the most likely type
and size available and the tray in
which they are available.
Press
(Select button) to accept
the values in the message, or use
(Up button) and
(Down
button) to scroll through the
available choices.
Wait for printer to
reinitialize
The printer is reinitializing in one of
the following situations:
●
The user has changed the RAM
DISK settings before the printer
is automatically rebooted.
●
The printer is auto power
cycling after changing external
device modes.
●
The user has exited
Diagnostics.
No action necessary.
Warming up
The printer is coming out of
Powersave mode. Printing
continues as soon as the printer has
warmed up.
No action necessary.
10.XX.YY SUPPLIES MEMORY
ERROR
An error has occurred in one or
more of the printer’s supplies.
Values of XX and YY are listed
below:
XX
00 = memory is defective
01 = memory is missing
YY
00 = black print cartridge
1
USE TRAY [XX]
[TYPE] [SIZE]
alternates with
To change press
/
To continue press
For help press
190 Troubleshooting
Verify that the correct media is
loaded in the tray.
Check the driver settings to
make sure that the expected
media type is selected.
Check the media-type settings
on the printer control panel to
make sure that the printer is set
for the media type that is in the
tray.
Refer to the printer software
online Help for more
information.
2
Turn the printer power off, and
then turn the printer power on
to clear the message.
If the message persists,
contact an HP-authorized
service or support provider
(see “Ordering parts and
supplies and getting support”
on page 242).
ENWW
Message
Description
Recommended action
13.XX.YZ JAM IN
[LOCATION]
alternates with
A jam has occurred in the specified
location. XX is the jam code, Y is
the device number, and Z is the
device type.
Possible locations include:
●
TRAY 1
●
TRAY 2
●
TRAY 3
Remove jammed media from the
specified location. (See “Jam
causes” on page 204.)
For help press
Note
This jam error message also occurs
when the media pickup system fails
to feed media into the printer
(known as a “mis-pick”). If there is
no jammed media, check the pickup
roller and separation pad in the
appropriate tray.
If the message persists after all
jams have been cleared, a sensor
might be stuck or broken. Check all
sensors and replace broken
sensors.
A jam has occurred in the specified
location. XX is the jam code, Y is
the device number, and Z is the
device type.
Possible locations include:
●
REAR DOOR
●
TOP COVER
Remove jammed media from the
specified location. (See “Jam
causes” on page 204.)
If the message persists after all
jams have been cleared, a sensor
might be stuck or broken.
A jam has occurred in the duplexer
(tray 2). XX is the jam code, Y is the
device number, and Z is the device
type.
Remove jammed media from tray 2.
(See “Jam causes” on page 204.)
If the message persists after all
jams have been cleared, a sensor
might be stuck or broken.
14.X FEED ROLLER<
ERROR
The rollers in tray X have worn out.
X is the number of the tray:
2 = tray 2
3 = tray 3.
Replace the rollers.
20 INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
alternates with
The printer received more data than
can fit in its available memory. You
might have tried to transfer too
many macros, soft fonts, or complex
graphics.
Press
(SELECT button) to print
the transferred data (some data
might be lost), and then simplify the
print job or install additional
memory.
The data (dense text, rules, raster
or vector graphics) sent to the
printer was too complex.
1
13.XX.YZ JAM INSIDE
[LOCATION]
alternates with
For help press
13.XX.YZ JAM
REMOVE TRAY 2
alternates with
For help press
To continue press
21 PAGE TOO COMPLEX
alternates with
To continue press
2
22 EIO [X]
BUFFER OVERFLOW
alternates with
To continue press
ENWW
Too much data was sent to the EIO
card in the specified slot [X]. An
incorrect communications protocol
might be in use.
1
2
Press
(SELECT button) to
print the transferred data.
(Some data might be lost.)
If this message appears often,
simplify the print job or install
additional memory.
Press
(SELECT button) to
clear the message. (The job will
not be printed.)
Check the host configuration.
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 191
Message
Description
Recommended action
22 PARALLEL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
alternates with
Too much data was sent to the
parallel port.
1
To continue press
2
3
Check for a loose cable
connection and be sure to use
a high-quality cable. Some
non-HP parallel cables might
be missing pin connections or
might otherwise not conform to
the IEEE-1284 specification.
(See “Ordering parts and
supplies and getting support”
on page 242.)
This error can occur if the
driver you are using is not
IEEE-1284 compliant. For best
results, use an HP driver that
came with the printer.
Press
(SELECT button) to
clear the error message. (The
job will not be printed.)
Too much data was sent to the
serial port.
Press
(SELECT button) to clear
the error message. (The job will not
be printed.)
22 USB I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
Too much data was sent to the USB
port.
Press
(SELECT button) to clear
the error message. (The job will not
be printed.)
40 EIO BAD SERIAL
TRANSMISSION
alternates with
The printer detects a serial data
error (parity, framing, or line
overrun) while receiving data from
the computer.
Press
(SELECT button) to clear
the error message and continue
printing.
40 EIO [X] BAD
TRANSMISSION
alternates with
To continue press
The connection has been broken
between the printer and the EIO
card in the specified slot [X].
Press
(SELECT button) to clear
the error message and continue
printing.
41.X PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
To continue press
A temporary printing error occurred. 1
X can equal one of the following:
1 = Unknown misprint error
2 = Beam detect misprint error
3 = Media feed error (size)
2
4 = No VSYNC error
5 = Media feed error (type)
6 = ITB detection error
7 = Feed delay error
9 = Noise VSREQ error
Press
(SELECT button).
The page containing the error
automatically reprints if jam
recovery is enabled.
Turn the printer power off, and
then turn the printer power on.
41.3 UNEXPECTED
SIZE IN TRAY [XX]
alternates with
This is typically caused if two or
more sheets stick together in the
printer or if the tray is not correctly
adjusted.
Reload the tray with the correct
paper size.
Press
(SELECT button) to
scroll to TRAY XX SIZE=.
Reconfigure the size in a tray
so that the printer will use a tray
that contains the size required
for the print job.
If the error does not clear, turn
the printer power off, then turn
the printer power on.
22 SERIAL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
alternates with
To continue press
To continue press
LOAD TRAY [XX]:
[TYPE] [SIZE]
1
2
3
192 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Message
Description
Recommended action
41.5 UNEXPECTED
TYPE IN TRAY XX
alternates with
LOAD TRAY [XX]:
The printer detected a paper type
different than what it was expecting.
1
2
[TYPE] [SIZE]
3
49.XXYY
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
To continue
turn off then on
ENWW
A critical firmware error has
occurred.
XX represents a component code,
and YY represents a componentspecific error code.
Reload the tray with the correct
paper type.
Press
(SELECT button) to
scroll to TRAY XX TYPE=.
Reconfigure the type in a tray
so that the printer uses a tray
that contains the type required
for the print job.
If the error does not clear, turn
the printer power off, and then
turn the printer power on.
Perform a cold reset (see page 229
for information about cold resets).
If the error persists, then try the
following actions:
1 Press CANCEL JOB to clear the
print job from the printer
memory. Turn the printer power
off, and then turn the printer
power on.
2 Try printing a job from a
different program. If the job
prints, go back to the first
program and try printing a
different file. (If the message
appears only with a certain
program or print job, contact
the software vendor for
assistance.
If the message persists with
different programs and print jobs, try
these steps.
1 Turn the printer power off.
2 Disconnect all cables to the
printer that connect it to the
network or computer.
3 Remove all memory DIMMs or
third-party DIMMs from the
printer.
4 Remove all EIO devices from
the printer.
5 Turn the printer power on.
If the error no longer exists, follow
these steps.
1 Install each DIMM and EIO
device one at a time, making
sure to turn the printer power
off and back on as you install
each device.
2 Replace a DIMM or EIO device
if you determine that it causes
the error.
3 Reconnect all cables that
connect the printer to the
network or computer.
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 193
Message
Description
Recommended action
50.X FUSER ERROR
A fuser error has occurred.
X can equal one of the following:
1 = Low fuser temperature
2 = Fuser warm up service
3 = High fuser temperature
4 = Faulty fuser
5 = Inconsistent fuser
6 = Open fuser
7 = Fuser pressure release
mechanism failure
Turn the printer power off and then
turn the printer power on.
For help press
194 Troubleshooting
51.X
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
To continue
turn off then on
A temporary printing error occurred. Turn the printer power off, and then
X can equal one of the following:
turn the printer power on.
1 = Beam detect error
2 = Laser error
52.X
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
To continue
turn off then on
A temporary printing error occurred. 1
X can equal one of the following:
0 = Scanner error
2
1 = Scanner startup error
2 = Scanner rotation error
This error can also indicate a
problem with the shutter tab on the
print cartridge.
Turn the printer power off, and
then turn the printer power on.
If the message persists, check
the print cartridge for damage
or try a different print cartridge.
53.XY.ZZ CHECK
RAM/ROM MEMORY
There is a problem with the printer
memory. The DIMM that caused the
error is not used.
X signifies the DIMM type and can
equal one of the following:
0 = ROM
1 = RAM
Y signifies the device location and
can equal one of the following:
0 = On board RAM/ROM
1 = DIMM Slot 1
2 = DIMM Slot 2
3 = DIMM Slot 3
ZZ signifies the error number and
can equal one of the following:
0 = Unsupported memory (e.g.,
presence detect bad)
1 = Unrecognized memory (e.g.,
presence detect bad)
2 = Unsupported memory size
3 = Failed RAM test
4 = Exceeded maximum RAM size
5 = Exceeded maximum ROM size
6 = Invalid DIMM speed
You might need to reseat or
replace the specified DIMM.
Turn the printer power off and
then reseat the DIMM that
caused the error.
Try using a different printer
driver or printing a smaller file.
1
2
ENWW
ENWW
Message
Description
Recommended action
55.X
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
To continue
turn off then on
A temporary printing error occurred. 1
X can equal one of the following:
0 = NO_RESET_REPORT
2
1 = NO_ENGINE_RESPONSE
2 = EXCESSIVE_GLITCHES
3 = LOST_PPRDY_SIGNAL
4 = COMMUNICATION_TIMEOUT
5 = BAD_TRAY_BIN_REPORTS
6 = ECC7_COMMAND_ERROR
7 = INCOMING_PARITY_ERROR
8 = OUTGOING_PARITY_ERROR
9 = MISSED_INTERRUPT
A = HUNG_COMMUNICATIONS
B = LOST_XISR_ERROR
C = INVALID_BUS_TIMEOUT
D = VERY_LATE_ECOMM_ISR
56.X
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
To continue
turn off then on
A temporary printing error occurred
as a result of an incorrect input or
output request.
X can equal one of the following:
1 = Illegal input
2 = Illegal output
Turn the printer power off, and then
turn the printer power on.
57.X
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
To continue
turn off then on
A temporary printing error occurred
in one of the printer fans. X
represents the fan motor number
associated with the error. For
example, 1 = fan motor 1.
Turn the printer power off, and then
turn the printer power on.
58.X
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
To continue
turn off then on
A printer error has occurred where a
memory tag CPU error was
detected, or there is a problem with
the air sensor or power supply.
X can equal one of the following:
2 = Air Temp Sensor
3 = CPU
4 = Power supply
To resolve problems with the power
supply:
1 Remove the printer from any
UPS supplies, additional power
supplies, or power strips. Plug
the printer into a wall outlet and
see if this resolves the problem.
2 If the printer is already plugged
into a wall outlet, try another
power source in the building
that is independent of the one
currently being used.
The line voltage and current source
at the printer location might need to
be inspected to ensure that they
meet the electrical specifications for
the printer. (See “Electrical
specifications” on page 20.)
Turn the printer power off and
then turn the printer power on.
Try using a different printer
driver or printing a smaller file.
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 195
Message
Description
Recommended action
59.X
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
To continue
turn off then on
A temporary motor error occurred.
Turn the printer power off, and then
X can equal one of the following:
turn the printer power on.
0 = Motor error
1 = Motor startup error
2 = Motor rotation error
3 = Fuser motor startup error
4 = Fuser motor rotation error
5 = Print cartridge motor startup
error
6 = Print cartridge motor rotation
error
7 = Image drum motor startup error
8 = Image drum motor rotation error
9 = ETB/ITB motor startup error
A = ETB/ITB motor rotation error
B = Alienation motor startup error
C = Alienation motor rotation error
D = Registration motor starting error
E = Registration motor rotation error
62 NO SYSTEM
This message indicates that no
system was found. The printer
software system is corrupt.
Turn the printer power off, and then
turn the printer power on.
64 PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
A temporary printing error occurred
in the scan buffer.
Turn the printer power off, and then
turn the printer power on.
68.X STORAGE ERROR
SETTINGS CHANGED
alternates with
To continue press
One or more printer settings saved
to storage device X is invalid and
has been reset to its factory default.
X can equal one of the following:
0 = onboard NVRAM
1 = removable disk (flash or hard)
Press
(SELECT button) to clear
the error and continue printing.
Printing can continue, but the user
may experience unexpected
behavior because an error occurred
in permanent storage.
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE FULL
alternates with
To continue press
Storage device X is full.
X can equal one of the following:
0 = onboard NVRAM
1 = removable disk (flash or hard)
Press
(SELECT button) to clear
the error and continue printing.
Printing can continue, but the user
may experience unexpected
behavior because an error occurred
in permanent storage.
68.X PERMANENT
STORAGE WRITE FAIL
alternates with
To continue press
Storage device X is failing to write.
X can equal one of the following:
0 = onboard NVRAM
1 = removable disk (flash or hard)
Press
(SELECT button) to clear
the error and continue printing.
Printing can continue, but the user
may experience unexpected
behavior because an error occurred
in permanent storage.
69.X
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
To continue
turn off then on
A duplexing error has occured. X
represents the type of duplexing
error and can equal one of the
following:
0 = Duplex mechanism failure
1 = Duplex slide adjust failure
Turn the printer power off, and then
turn the printer power on.
To continue
turn off then on
196 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Message
Description
Recommended action
79.XXYY
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
To continue
turn off then on
The printer detected a critical
hardware error.
XX represents the component ID,
and YY represents a componentspecific error code.
1
Press CANCEL JOB to clear the
print job from the printer
memory. Turn the printer power
off, and then turn the printer
power on.
2 Try printing a job from a
different program. If the job
prints, go back to the first
program and try printing a
different file. (If the message
appears only with a certain
program or print job, contact
the software vendor for
assistance.
If the message persists with
different programs and print jobs, try
these steps.
1 Turn the printer power off.
2 Disconnect all cables to the
printer that connect it to the
network or computer.
3 Remove all memory DIMMs or
third-party DIMMs from the
printer.
4 Remove all EIO devices from
the printer.
5 Turn the printer power on.
If the error no longer exists, follow
these steps.
1 Install each DIMM and EIO
device one at a time, making
sure to turn the printer power
off and back on as you install
each device.
2 Replace a DIMM or EIO device
if you determine that it causes
the error.
3 Reconnect all cables that
connect the printer to the
network or computer.
8X.YYYY
EIO ERROR
The EIO accessory card has
encountered a critical error.
X reprensents the error location and
can equal one of the following:
1 = Slot number 1
2 = Slot number 2
3 = Slot number 3
6 = Card in slot number 1
7 = Card in slot number 2
8 = Card in slot number 3
YYYY represents the error code.
1
2
3
4
ENWW
Turn the printer power off, and
then turn the printer power on.
Turn the printer power off,
reseat the EIO accessory in
slot [X], and then turn the
printer power on.
Turn the printer power off,
remove the EIO accessory
from slot [X], install it in a
different EIO slot, and then turn
the printer power on.
Replace the EIO accessory in
slot [X].
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 197
Media-handling problems
Printing a configuration page
The configuration page lists many of the printer’s current settings and properties. To print the
configuration page:
1
Press
(SELECT).
2
Use
(UP arrow) or
(SELECT).
3
Use
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press
(UP arrow) or
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to PRINT CONFIGURATION, and then press
(SELECT). The printer produces a configuration page.
If you have an EIO print-server card installed, a second page, the Jetdirect page, prints, listing all
of the HP Jetdirect information (see “Printing a Jetdirect configuration page” on page 199).
The configuration page can also be printed from the HP LaserJet device configuration reports
page.
Figure 106.
1
4
2
5
3
6
Configuration page
Configuration-page elements
1
Printer information lists the name, printer number, serial number, formatter number,
firmware datecode, service ID, PS wait timeout, and total pages printed.
2
Event log lists the number of entries in use, the maximum number of entries, and the three
most recent entries.
3
Installed personalities and options lists the installed printer languages (PCL, PCL 6, and
PS), DIMM slot information, EIO slot information, and RAM disk storage.
4
Memory lists total memory and available memory.
5
Security lists the control panel lock status, the control panel password status, and the write
protect status.
6
Paper trays and options lists the default paper size and the media sizes and types
assigned to each tray.
198 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Printing a Jetdirect configuration page
The printer produces a Jetdirect configuration page when you print a standard configuration
page on a printer that has an EIO print-server card installed (see “Printing a configuration page”
on page 198).
1
2
3
4
Figure 107.
Jetdirect configuration page
Jetdirect configuration-page elements
ENWW
1
General information lists the HP Jetdirect number, firmware revision, LAN hardware
address, selected port, and manufacturing ID.
2
Security settings lists administrative password, SSL/TLS, cert expiration date, SNMP
versions, SNMP set CMTY name, and access list.
3
Network statistics lists total packets received, unicast packets received, bad packets
received, framing errors received, total packets received, unsendable packets, transmit
collisions, and transmit late collisions.
4
Protocol information lists TCP/IP status and configuration, the HP Web JetAdmin server
name, Novell NetWare status and configuration, AppleTalk status and configuration, and
DLC/LLC status.
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 199
Printing a usage page
A usage page provides details of the number of pages printed since the printer’s installation and
an estimated toner coverage percentage.
1
Press
(SELECT).
2
Use
(UP arrow) or
(SELECT).
3
Use
(UP arrow) or
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to PRINT USAGE PAGE, and then press
(SELECT). The printer produces a usage page.
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press
Printing a supplies status page
A supplies status page provides data on your printer supplies, including:
●
Print cartridge toner level
●
Estimated pages remaining
●
Cartridge serial number
●
Pages printed on the current cartridge
●
Pages printed by paper size
●
Number of jobs processed
●
Installation date
●
Date cartridge was last used
To print a supplies status page, complete the following steps:
1
Press
2
Use
(UP arrow) or
(SELECT).
3
Use
press
200 Troubleshooting
(SELECT).
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to INFORMATION, and then press
(UP arrow) or
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE, and then
(SELECT). The printer produces a supplies status page.
ENWW
Printing an engine test
The engine test verifies that the print engine is functioning correctly. This test is very useful for
isolating printer problems, because it does not involve the formatter. Because the engine test
prints a full page of lines across the entire printable area, it is also useful for checking and
adjusting registration.
The engine test prints from the first tray found that contains media and can be activated with the
formatter installed or removed.
Note
Make sure that the print cartridge is installed in the printer. Also, the print motor must be idle and
the printer must be in standby mode.
In order to produce an engine test print, media must be loaded into the printer. The printer prints
the engine test page on media from the same tray as the previous engine test. If the engine test
fails to print the engine test page, turn the printer off and then turn it back on. After a powercycle, the system checks for media in tray 2, then in tray 1, and finally in tray 3 (if installed).
1
Open the I/O cover.
2
Press the engine test button (callout 1).
2
1
Figure 108.
ENWW
Engine test button
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 201
The printer prints an engine test page, like the page shown below.
Figure 109.
Engine test page
202 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Jam troubleshooting
Jams occur in the printer when print media does not reach or clear a photosensor along the
printer paper path within a specific amount of time. The following table contains general
questions and topics to explore before troubleshooting.
Problem
Action
What is the frequency Verify with the customer. See “Troubleshooting with control-panel messages” on
of the jams (for
page 184.
example: continuous,
Check the event log.
one jam per 100 pages,
one jam per 1000
pages)?
Do jams occur with a
Try using media that you know is of good quality. See “Media troubleshooting” on
specific type of media? page 217.
Where does the leading Attempt to duplicate the problem. Inspect the paper path and all paper path
edge of the first sheet mechanical assemblies located before the leading edge of the jam.
of media in the printer
paper path stop when a
jam occurs? Are any
sheets damaged or
torn?
Is the customer loading Observe the customer loading media. Instruct the customer to break the ream,
the trays or cassettes
and not to fan the media. See “Media troubleshooting” on page 217.
correctly?
Is the customer
overfilling the trays or
cassettes?
Observe the customer loading media in the trays or cassettes. Make sure that the
media is not over the maximum fill marks in the trays or cassettes.
Are the tray guides set
correctly?
Make sure all front and rear tray 2 and optional 250-sheet or 500-sheet feeder
guides are set correctly.
Does the printer need
cleaning?
Inspect the paper path and paper-path rollers.
Frequency of jams
Jams in the paper path that occur intermittently are most often related to a deficiency in the
media or environment. See “Media troubleshooting” on page 217 for information about these
defects.
Paper-path jams that occur frequently, and in the same location of the printer, are most likely the
result of a hardware problem.
ENWW
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 203
Jam causes
Occasionally, media can become jammed during a print job. The following are some of the
causes:
●
Trays are loaded incorrectly or overfilled.
●
Tray 2 or tray 3 is removed during a print job.
●
The top cover is opened during a print job.
●
The media that is being used does not meet HP specifications (see “Media specifications” on
page 34).
●
The media that is being used is outside of the supported size range (see “Media
specifications” on page 34.)
Typical jam locations
Frequently occurring jams can be further categorized by their location in the printer. The four
major areas of the printer are the input area, the print-cartridge area, the paper access area, and
the output area. Because the pick-and-feed operation is almost identical for trays 1, 2, and 3,
jams in the input area follow the same pattern.
Jams can occur at four locations:
1
4
2
Note
3
1
Output-bin areas (see “Output areas” on page 205)
2
Paper-access areas (applies only to the HP LaserJet 2300d printer,
HP LaserJet 2300dn printer, and HP LaserJet 2300dtn printer) (see “Paper-access area”
on page 206)
3
Input-tray areas (see “Tray 2 or tray 3 input area” on page 207)
4
Print-cartridge area (see “Print-cartridge area” on page 208)
Find and remove the jammed media by using the instructions provided in this section. If the location
of the jam is not obvious, look first in the print-cartridge area.
If possible, avoid tearing the jammed media. Be sure to remove all torn pieces of media that remain
in the printer.
Loose toner might remain in the printer after a jam. This should clear after a few sheets have been
printed.
204 Troubleshooting
ENWW
1
Output areas
Jams in this area might result in loose toner on the page. If you get any
toner on your clothes or hands, wash them in cold water. (Hot water sets
toner into the fabric.)
1
2
Open the top cover and remove the print cartridge. Open the
rear output bin.
Note
It is necessary to open the top cover in order to release the rear output
gearing and remove the media easily.
2
If the media is visible from the rear output opening, carefully use
both hands to pull the leading edge out of the printer. Carefully
remove the rest of the jammed media from the printer.
3
If the paper is almost completely visible from the top output bin, pull
the remaining paper carefully out of the printer.
3
If the leading edge is not visible or barely visible in the
print-cartridge area, open the rear output bin all the way. To do this,
push the bin door slightly forward and use your finger to disengage
the grill at the base. Turn the jam-clearing wheel to move the media
out of the printer.
4
4
Reinstall the print cartridge. Close the top cover and the
rear output bin.
Note
If the print cartridge is difficult to reinstall, make sure that the registration
plate has been flipped back down into position and that you have
pushed the print cartridge firmly in place.
If the Attention light does not go out, jammed media remains inside the
printer. Check the paper-feed and rear-output areas for jams. For
printers that include a built-in duplexer (HP LaserJet 2300d printer,
HP LaserJet 2300dn printer, and HP LaserJet 2300dtn printer), check
the duplexer area.
Table 20. Output area jams recommended actions
Possible cause
Recommended action
Fuser is defective
Replace the fuser.
Upper/lower face-down delivery rollers
Replace the appropriate delivery rollers.
Engine controller PCA
Replace the engine controller PCA.
Power supply assembly
Replace the power supply.
ENWW
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 205
1
Paper-access area
Jams in the paper access area can occur only when using the two-sided
printing capabilities of the HP LaserJet 2300d printer,
HP LaserJet 2300dn printer, or HP LaserJet 2300dtn printer.
2
3
1
Remove tray 2 from the printer.
2
Pull the green lever on the left front of the tray 2 opening to open the
paper access plate.
3
Reach in and pull out the jammed paper.
4
Push the bottom of the paper access plate back up until it clicks into
place on both sides (both sides need to be engaged).
5
Reinstall tray 2.
6
To reset the printer and continue printing, open the top cover all the
way and then close it.
Note
If the Attention light does not go out, jammed media remains inside the
printer. Check the paper-feed and rear-output areas for jams.
4
Table 21. Paper access area jams—recommended actions
Possible cause
Recommended action
Unlatched paper access plate
Latch paper access plate.
Reverse-paper sensor is defective.
Replace the reverse-paper sensor.
Automatic duplexer pickup paper sensor
Replace the automatic duplexer pickup paper sensor.
Position guide assembly
Replace the position guide assembly.
Engine controller PCA
Replace the engine controller PCA.
Power supply assembly
Replace the power supply.
206 Troubleshooting
ENWW
1
Tray 2 or tray 3 input area
Note
If paper has entered the print-cartridge area, follow the instructions in
“Print-cartridge area” on page 208. It is easier to remove paper from the
print-cartridge area than from the paper-feed area.
2
3
4
1
Slide out tray 2 or tray 3 to expose the jam.
2
Remove any misfed paper by pulling it out by the visible edge. Make
sure that all of the paper is aligned in the tray. If tray 3 is installed,
remove any misfed paper and make sure that all of the paper is
aligned in that tray.
3
If the paper is jammed in the paper-feed area and cannot be
accessed from the print-cartridge area, grasp the paper and
carefully pull it free from the printer.
4
For tray 2, push the paper down to lock the metal paper-lift plate into
place. For both trays, slide the tray back into the printer.
5
To reset the printer and continue printing, open the top cover all the
way and then close it.
Note
If the Attention light does not go out, jammed media remains inside the
printer. Check the paper-feed and rear-output areas for jams. For
printers that include a built-in duplexer (HP LaserJet 2300d printer,
HP LaserJet 2300dn printer, and HP LaserJet 2300dtn printer), check
the duplexer area.
Table 22. Input-area jams
Possible cause
Recommended action
Tray photo sensors are blocked or inoperative
Inspect photosensors in all trays and replace trays as needed.
Pickup roller is dirty or inoperative
Inspect the pickup rollers in all trays and clean or replace the pickup rollers as
needed.
Pickup assembly is defective
Replace the tray with the defective pickup assembly.
Separation pad
Inspect the separation pads in all trays and replace pads as needed.
Feed rollers
Inspect the feed rollers and replace rollers as needed.
Solenoid
Inspect the solenoid in all trays and replace trays as needed.
Paper feeder PCA in tray 3 is defective
Replace tray 3.
Engine controller PCA
Replace the engine controller PCA.
Power supply assembly
Replace the power supply.
ENWW
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 207
1
Print-cartridge area
Jams in this area might result in loose toner on the page. If you get any
toner on your clothes or hands, wash them in cold water. (Hot water sets
toner into the fabric.)
2
3
4
1
Open the top cover.
2
Remove the print cartridge.
CAUTION
To prevent damage, do not expose the print cartridge to light for more
than a few minutes. Place a piece of paper over the top of the print
cartridge to shield it while it is out of the printer.
3
Carefully lift up the registration plate. If the leading edge of the print
media is visible, gently pull the media toward the rear of the printer
to remove it from the printer.
4
If the media is difficult to remove or has already entered the output
area, remove the jam as described in “Output areas” on page 205.
5
When the jammed media has been removed, gently flip down the
registration plate. Reinstall the print cartridge and shut the top
cover.
Note
If the print cartridge is difficult to reinstall, make sure that the registration
plate has been flipped back down into position and that you have
pushed the print cartridge firmly into place.
If the Attention light does not go out, jammed media remains inside the
printer. Check the paper-feed and rear-output areas for jams. For
printers that include a built-in duplexer (the HP LaserJet 2300d printer,
HP LaserJet 2300dn printer, and HP LaserJet 2300dtn printer), check
the duplexer area.
Table 23. Possible causes of frequent jams in the cartridge area
Possible cause
Recommended action
Tray photosensors are blocked or inoperative
Inspect photosensors in all trays and replace trays as needed.
Registration assembly is defective
Replace the registration assembly.
Transfer roller assembly is defective
Replace the transfer roller.
Print cartridge is defective
Inspect and replace the print cartridge if needed.
Transport assembly is defective
Inspect the transport belts and replace the belts as needed.
Engine controller PCB
Replace the engine controller.
Power supply assembly
Replace the power supply.
Fuser is defective
Replace the fuser.
Media sticks to the cartridge
Turn on “more separation” (see page 62)
208 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Image-formation troubleshooting
When you are working with customers, obtain a print sample before troubleshooting the printer.
Ask the customer to describe the quality expected from the printer. The print sample also helps
clarify the customer’s description of the problem.
Often an image-formation problem can be linked to media that is outside the specifications that
Hewlett-Packard has established for optimum printer performance. See “Media troubleshooting”
on page 217 for help with persistent image-formation problems.
Image-quality
checks
Action
Does the problem
repeat on the page?
Use the “Repetitive defect ruler” on page 226 to determine the source of the
problem.
Is the print cartridge full See “Check the print cartridge” on page 210 for information about the print
and is it manufactured cartridge.
by HP?
Is the customer using
print media that meets
all HP specification
standards?
See chapter 2, beginning on page 34, for information about media specifications.
Is the print sample
similar to those in the
image-defect tables?
Compare the sample to the tables and perform the actions recommended in the
“Image-defect tables” on page 211.
Is the problem on the
print cartridge or the
transfer roller?
Perform a half-self-test functional check (see page 227) to determine the location
of the defect.
If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum surface, assume that the
first four functions of the electrophotographic process—cleaning, conditioning,
writing, and developing—are functioning correctly, and troubleshoot the failure as
a transfer or fusing problem. (See chapter 5 for information about the the
electrophotographic process.)
Is the customer using a See “Media troubleshooting” on page 217.
media type that is
recommended for this
product?
ENWW
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 209
Check the print cartridge
Image-formation defects are often the result of problems with the print cartridge. Use the
following list to verify that the print cartridge is still operating correctly.
Note
Non-HP print cartridges can cause many types of image-formation defects. When the customer
experiences image defects, check the print cartridges to verify that they are HP products.
Perform all of the following checks before replacing the print cartridge.
Note
●
Check the print cartridge to see if it has been disassembled or refilled.
●
Verify that the print cartridge is seated correctly in the printer cavity.
●
Inspect the cartridge for toner leaking through worn seals. (Manual rotation of the drum can
cause internal damage, and toner spills can result.)
●
White areas on the page can indicate that the drum has been exposed to light for too long.
The print cartridge is rated for 6,000 images at 5-percent coverage. Check the surface of the
photosensitive drum in the cartridge to see if it has been damaged or scratched. Touching the
drum contaminates the photosensitive surface, which can cause spotting and defects during
printing.
EconoMode
EconoMode creates draft-quality printing by reducing the amount of toner on the printed page.
Advise the customer to turn EconoMode on or off, either from the printer driver or a software
application.
CAUTION
Hewlett-Packard does not recommend full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode is used full-time,
then the toner supply might outlast the mechanical parts in the print cartridge.
Image defects unique to the HP LaserJet 2300 series printers
Ashley’s ghost
Ashley’s ghost can appear on images in conditions of low humidity and low temperature. Images
with high coverage of grayscale at the leading edge experience ghosting from the leading edge.
Toner explosion
Toner explosion can appear as stray toner on the horizontal lines in conditions of high humidity in
images on labels and recycled media. To combat toner explosion, try turning on the “line detail”
setting in the control-panel menus (see page 62).
Halo
Halo can appear as stray toner around printed characters in conditions of high humidity and high
temperature on the second side of a duplexed print job, especially when using a higher-gloss
media. To combat halo, try turning on the “high transfer” setting in the control-panel menus (see
page 62).
210 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Image-defect tables
Judgments about print quality are subjective. This section of the manual helps define print-quality
defects and the factors that affect print quality.
The print samples shown in the following figures illustrate some print-quality defects. Keep
copies of print-quality defects that you encounter in the field and explanations of their causes.
You can use these samples for future reference.
Note
Non-HP print cartridges can cause many of the problems that are illustrated here. When the
customer experiences image defects, check the print cartridges to verify that they are HP products.
Light print or fade
Toner specks
Dropouts
Vertical lines
Gray background
Toner smear
Loose toner
Repetitive defect
Misformed characters
Page skew
Curl or wave
Wrinkles or creases
Ghosting (light)
Ghosting (dark)
Toner scatter outline
Figure 110.
ENWW
White or missing image
Image defects examples
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 211
Table 24. Image defects
Problem
Cause
Solution
Light print or fade
Wrong toner-density setting is in use.
●
Through the software, adjust the toner density
setting. Make sure EconoMode is off.
The print media does not meet printer specifications
or is stored incorrectly.
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
Turn over the stack of media in the tray. Also try
rotating the media 180 degrees.
If the print media does not meet HP
specifications, replace the media and advise the
customer to use the recommended print media
and to store it correctly.
●
●
The toner supply is low
●
●
Toner specks
The transfer roller is dirty.
●
Clean the inside of the printer or use the
printer’s cleaning page.
The print media does not meet printer specifications
or is stored incorrectly.
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
Turn over the stack of media in the tray. Also try
rotating the media 180 degrees.
If the print media does not meet HP
specifications, replace the media and advise the
customer to use the recommended print media
and to store it correctly.
●
●
Dropouts
The paper path is dirty.
●
Clean the inside of the printer or use the
printer’s cleaning page.
The fuser setting is incorrect for the paper type.
●
At the control panel, change the fuser mode
setting or choose another paper type in the
printer driver.
A single sheet of paper is defective.
●
Try to reprint the job.
The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the
paper has moist spots on it.
●
Try paper from a different source.
The paper lot is bad.
●
Try a different kind or brand of paper.
The print cartridge might be defective.
●
Check for vertical repetitive defects.
Replace the print cartridge.
●
Vertical lines
Temporarily extend the print cartridge life by
redistributing the toner.
If this does not improve the print quality, install a
new print cartridge.
The fuser setting is incorrect for the paper type.
●
At the control panel, change the fuser mode
setting or choose another paper type in the
printer driver.
The print cartridge is defective.
●
Replace the print cartridge.
The fuser entrance guide is dirty.
●
Clean the guide.
The fuser is scratched.
●
Replace the fuser.
212 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Table 24. Image defects (continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Gray background
The print media does not meet printer specifications
or is stored incorrectly.
●
●
●
Toner smear
The printer’s operating environment does not meet
specifications.
●
Make sure the printer’s operating environment
meets specifications.
The wrong toner density setting is in use.
●
Through the software, adjust the toner density
setting. Make sure EconoMode is off.
The print cartridge is defective.
●
Replace the print cartridge.
The printer interior is dirty.
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
Clean the inside of the printer or use the printer
cleaning page.
●
Loose toner
The print media might be too smooth.
●
Check the print media type and quality.
The print cartridge is defective.
●
Replace the print cartridge.
The fuser setting is incorrect for the paper type.
●
At the control panel, change the fuser mode
setting or choose another paper type in the
printer driver.
The printer interior is dirty.
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
Clean the inside of the printer, or use the printer
cleaning page.
●
Repetitive defects
The print cartridge is defective.
●
Replace the print cartridge.
The print media might be too smooth.
●
Check the print media type and quality.
The fuser is defective.
●
The fuser setting is incorrect for the paper type.
●
At the control panel, change the fuser mode
setting or choose another paper type in the
printer driver.
The internal parts are dirty or defective.
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
Clean the inside of the printer or use the printer
cleaning page.
●
The print cartridge is damaged.
●
●
The fuser is defective.
ENWW
Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
Turn over the stack of media in the tray. Also try
rotating the media 180 degrees.
If the print media does not meet HP
specifications, replace the media, and advise
the customer to use the recommended print
media and to store it correctly.
●
Replace the fuser.
See the “Repetitive defect ruler” on page 227.
Replace the print cartridge.
Replace the fuser.
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 213
Table 24. Image defects (continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Misformed
characters
Maintenance is due.
●
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
Make sure that the printer operating
environment meets specifications.
Print a demo page to verify that the problem
persists.
Perform maintenance actions as required.
The print media might be too smooth.
●
Check the print media type and quality.
The print media does not meet printer specifications
or is stored incorrectly.
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
Verify that there are no torn pieces of media
inside the printer.
Turn over the stack of media in the tray. Also try
rotating the media 180 degrees.
If the print media does not meet HP
specifications, replace the media.
●
●
Page skew
●
●
●
Curl or wave
The print media is not loaded correctly or trays are
not adjusted correctly.
●
Make sure print media is loaded correctly and
that the guides fit correctly against the media
stack.
Registration assembly is incorrectly installed.
●
Be sure that the registration assembly is
installed correctly.
The print media does not meet printer specifications
or is stored incorrectly.
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
Turn over the stack of media in the tray. Also try
rotating the media 180 degrees.
If the print media does not meet HP
specifications, replace the media.
●
●
Wrinkles or creases
Printer’s operating environment does not meet
specifications.
●
Make sure the printer’s operating environment
meets specifications.
Wrong output bin.
●
Print to a different output bin (top or rear output
bin).
The print media does not meet printer specifications
or is stored incorrectly.
●
Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
Turn over the stack of media in the tray. Also try
rotating the media 180 degrees.
If the print media does not meet hp
specifications, replace the paper.
●
●
The print media is loaded incorrectly.
●
Make sure print media is loaded correctly and
that the guides fit correctly against the media
stack.
Wrong tray.
●
Print from a different tray (such as tray 1).
Wrong output bin for print media type.
●
Print to a different output bin (top or rear output
bin).
214 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Table 24. Image defects (continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
Toner scatter outline
The print media does not meet printer specifications
or is stored incorrectly.
●
●
●
Maintenance due.
●
●
●
Ghosting (light)
This type of defect might occur when using
preprinted forms, a large quantity of narrow media,
or a fuser mode that is set too high for your media.
●
●
●
●
Ghosting (dark)
This type of defect might occur when using
preprinted forms, a large quantity of narrow media,
or a fuser mode that is set too high for your media.
●
●
●
●
ENWW
Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
Turn over the stack of media in the tray. Also try
rotating the media 180 degrees.
If the print media does not meet HP
specifications, replace the paper.
Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
Print a demo page to verify problem persists.
Perform maintenance actions as required.
Print a few more pages and see if the problem
corrects itself.
Make sure that print media type and quality
meet HP specifications.
If the defect occurs later in a print job, turn the
printer off for ten minutes, and then turn the
printer on to restart the print job.
Check your fuser mode.
Print a few more pages and see if the problem
corrects itself.
Make sure that print media type and quality
meet HP specifications.
If the defect occurs later in a print job, turn the
printer off for ten minutes, and then turn the
printer on to restart the print job.
Check your fuser mode.
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 215
Table 24. Image defects (continued)
Problem
Cause
Solution
White or missing
image/blank page
No toner is available for print.
●
Remove sealing tape or replace the print
cartridge. Look for the REPLACE CARTRIDGE
message on the control panel display.
Defective laser shutter.
●
Check that the laser shutter operates freely
when the print cartridge is installed.
Toner cartridge guide damaged, incorrectly
positioned, or missing.
●
Make sure the guide is installed correctly above
the print cartridge.
No transfer roller voltage.
●
Without transfer roller voltage, toner cannot be
attracted from the surface of the drum to the
print media. Perform the half-self-test functional
check to check all other electrophotographic
processes. See “Half-self-test functional check”
on page 227. Replace the transfer roller if
necessary.
No developing bias.
●
Clean the high-voltage power supply contacts.
With no developing bias charge, toner is not
attracted to the drum.
Replace the power supply.
●
No drum ground path.
●
●
●
Defective laser scanner cable assembly.
216 Troubleshooting
●
With no ground path, the drum cannot
discharge. The negative charge on the drum
repels toner, and leaves a white page with
bubble print.
Check the drum ground spring and reconnect it,
if necessary.
Replace the power supply PCB.
Low-level signals exchanged between the laser/
scanner assembly and the engine controller
PCB might be affecting laser output. Replace
the laser/scanner cable assembly.
ENWW
Media troubleshooting
Media defects can cause jams and image defects. If the previously described conditions are
corrected and do not eliminate the printing problem, continue to investigate the media as the
source of the defect.
Problems with print media are sometimes difficult to detect. Follow a standard troubleshooting
procedure to help isolate media-related problems. The steps to follow are:
●
“Determine the problem source: print media or printer” on page 217.
●
“Isolate a paper path” on page 217.
●
“Isolate a media brand” on page 218.
●
“Isolate a media type” on page 219.
●
“Evaluate media use practices” on page 223.
●
“Evaluate environmental conditions” on page 223.
Determine the problem source: print media or printer
When determining the cause of a printer failure, a distinction must be made between problems
that relate to the printer itself and those that involve print media. Often a problem that seems to
be related to the printer is actually a matter of poor print-media selection or handling. To
determine if a problem is caused by the printer or by the media, try a few simple steps to remedy
the situation:
●
Turn media over in the tray to print on the reverse side.
●
Rotate sheets 180 degrees (end to end) to feed with a different leading edge.
If the symptoms cease, or change in some way, it can be assumed that the problems are caused
by the print media.
Isolate a paper path
Try using the straightest paper path
Some problems can be avoided by using the straightest available paper path. Usually this means
paper feeds from the upper paper tray or manual feeder, and exits into the rear output bin. This
path is recommended for envelopes and media with a heavy basis weight.
Determine if the problem is caused by duplexing
Paper that has just made a pass through the printer can show increased media curl. Media curl
increases image dropout, and creates pickup and stacking problems. When the second pass is
made, print media might not meet the specifications for moisture and curl. Dry paper can hold
static charges that affect print quality and stacking of the duplexed page. Media shrinkage
resulting from a second pass through the printer can cause image misalignment on the duplexed
page.
Isolate the source of the jam
Define the source of the media that is jamming:
ENWW
●
tray 1
●
tray 2
●
tray 3 (250-sheet or 500-sheet)
●
paper access area
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 217
Determine where media jams occur
Check where media stops when a jam occurs. Types of jams include:
●
input paper jams
●
internal paper-path jams
●
paper access plate
●
output-bin jams
Determine whether the printer is experiencing misfeeds or multifeed jams
The following are some possible causes of misfeeds or multifeed jams:
●
The media might be too stiff. Check basis weight and measure caliper. (See pages 44
through 48 for information about testing media.)
●
The paper might be too smooth. Check the finish.
●
The paper might be too heavy or too light. Check basis weight. (See pages 44 through 48 for
information about testing media.)
●
The customer might be attempting to print embossed paper, pre printed forms, or perforated
paper that does not meet HP specifications. See “Isolate a media brand” on page 218 below
or details about issues involved in printing on embossed paper.
●
The paper might be loaded incorrectly. Turn over the sheets in the paper tray to determine if
in-ream curl is causing misfeeds.
●
The customer might be fanning media before loading it into the tray.
●
The customer might be adding media in small amounts. Do not add small amounts of media
or mix types of media in the tray.
●
The printer or media storage environment might be too humid or too dry. (As a result, media
might be too moist or too dry.) Determine if this is the case and advise the customer.
Isolate a media brand
If the printer jams with only one brand of media:
●
Try switching media brands.
●
If the paper ream in use appears to be old, open a fresh ream of the same paper and load it
correctly into the printer. If the problem disappears, investigate storage and handling
conditions.
218 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Isolate a media type
When jams and other problems occur frequently, it is often because the customer is using a
special paper. Customers must only use print media that conforms to all Hewlett-Packard
specifications, and should always test media before purchasing large quantities. Media should
be tested before storage to verify quality printing results. Then, if problems arise, storage or
handling conditions can isolate the most likely cause. Some types of media that might cause
problems are:
●
preprinted forms and special letterhead
●
embossed paper
●
perforated paper
●
adhesive labels
●
envelopes
●
transparencies
●
chemically treated paper
●
synthetic paper
●
coated paper
●
other special media
Preprinted forms and special letterhead
Many preprinted forms and special letterhead papers perform well in HP LaserJet printers.
However, these papers undergo processes that alter their original characteristics, and care must
be taken to ensure they conform to HP specifications. All special papers should be wrapped in
moisture-proof wrapping when purchased from the paper converter or printing house.
Forms and letterhead must be printed with inks that conform to the following specifications:
●
Only use ink that is heat-resistant, and that does not melt, scorch, or release hazardous
emissions when subjected to 200 degrees C (392 degrees F) for 0.1 second.
●
Inks must have resistance to silicon oils, and must not be affected by resin components in
toner.
●
Inks must not be flammable.
●
Inks must not “offset” (transfer from the printed paper onto the printer, contaminating internal
printer components). The principle cause of offset is ink that is not fully dried or that cannot
withstand the printer fusing temperature.
Note
Do not use low-temperature inks (the kind used with thermography).
Note
Do not purchase more media than can be easily used in a short time (about 3 months). Media
stored for long periods experiences heat and moisture extremes that can be damaging. Planning
is important to prevent damage to a large supply of media.
Hewlett-Packard neither warrants nor recommends the use of a particular brand of paper or print
media. Media properties are subject to manufacturing changes, and Hewllett-Packard has no
control over such changes. The customer assumes all responsibility for the quality and
performance of media.
ENWW
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 219
Embossed media
Embossed media is not recommended for use in HP LaserJet printers. Media is embossed by
stamping an image into the media by compressing the media fibers together at approximately
200 degrees C (392 degrees F), and sometimes by applying a thin metal foil to the surface. The
printer fusing process can loosen the foil; loose foil can interfere with the mechanical and
electronic operation of the printer.
Embossed paper, with or without foil, can also cause multifeed jams. Multiple embossed print
media sheets tend to stick to one another.
Media with cutouts or perforations
Avoid media with cutouts or perforations for these reasons:
●
Cut fibers absorb more moisture and can increase waviness and media curl. This decreases
the print quality near the cutout or perforated area.
●
The cutting knife leaves a sharp edge on the cutout or perforation. If this sharp edge is facing
the print cartridge drum during printing it can scratch the drum surface.
●
If printing occurs over a cutout hole the transfer roller is contaminated with unused toner.
Light streaks can result on the paper from the contaminated roller.
Adhesive labels
Labels are defined as media with a pressure-sensitive adhesive backing. Label stock includes
the top sheet, the adhesive, and the carrier sheet (also referred to as the backing). To prevent
media jams and feed problems, always use the rear output tray when printing on labels. You must
use the following guide lines when using labels:
●
Labels must be cut long grain (as opposed to short grain).
●
Labels must totally cover the carrier sheet (no spaces between the labels).
●
Labels must contain only acrylic-based adhesives.
●
Labels must contain no excessive adhesive. (Adhesive from some labels can cause jamming
resulting from buildup in the printer mechanism. The adhesive should not come into direct
contact with the printer at any time.)
●
Labels must meet Hewlett-Packard specifications for fusing compatibility.
●
Labels must meet Hewlett-Packard specifications for caliper.
●
Labels must have a carrier sheet that is not too smooth (which can cause the feed rollers to
slip).
Table 25. Adhesive label construction
Labels cover entire page
220 Troubleshooting
Carrier sheet exposed only
in vertical columns
Carrier sheet exposed in
perimeter margins
ENWW
Envelopes
Because of the variety of folds and cuts available, it is difficult to specify the types of envelopes
that perform well with HP LaserJet printers. It is very important to test a sample envelope before
purchasing a large quantity. The specifications for media also apply to envelopes. Avoid
envelopes that contain contact adhesives.
Following are a few recommendations for feeding envelopes:
●
●
●
●
Closely inspect the leading edge of the envelopes before feeding them into the printer. Verify
the leading edge is flat. Watch for envelope curl and loose folds. If necessary, flatten the
leading edge of the envelope before feeding.
Be patient! In manual-feed mode, the printer displays a message when prepared to accept
the next envelope. Always wait for this message to appear before loading or feeding
envelopes into the printer.
Do not allow a large quantity of envelopes to accumulate in the output tray. If too many
envelopes accumulate, they can interfere with the output path.
Use the rear output tray when printing envelopes.
The main causes of problems with envelopes on HP LaserJet printers are:
●
●
●
●
folds (two or more thicknesses of paper)
edge creases (sharp or rounded)
glued edges (sealing when fused)
uneven printing surfaces
For fewer problems, follow these guidelines:
●
●
●
●
●
●
Corner folds must be well-creased, and contain no more than two thicknesses of paper.
Envelopes must lie flat.
Paper grain should be diagonal.
Adhesives must meet HP specifications for fusing compatibility.
Basis weight must not exceed 11 kg (28 lb).
Under no circumstances should envelopes have clasps, snaps, or windows, or use synthetic
materials. Severe damage to the printer can result.
Table 26. Envelope construction
Good construction
ENWW
Poor construction
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 221
Transparencies
Printing on transparencies presents a special set of challenges. The surface resistance of a
transparency can be infinite, causing the transparency to act like paper with 0 percent moisture
content. This can result in streaks and smudging. Static charges can accumulate on some
transparent stock and cause multifeed jams. Also, certain brands and types of transparencies do
not tolerate exposure to the fuser.
The user should only select transparencies that meet HP specifications. Among the common
precautions are:
●
Print transparencies to the top output bin to avoid jams.
●
Transparencies must have correct resistivity (not built-up static charge).
●
Transparencies must meet HP specifications for fusing compatibility.
●
Each sheet should be removed from the tray and placed on a flat surface before printing the
next sheet. This keeps the toner form rubbing off from the one sheet to the sheet before it
has had time to cool.
Chemically treated media
Coatings such as lacquers, polymers, laminations, or other chemicals protect the paper but can
cause problems in the fuser and transfer areas of Hewlett-Packard LaserJet printers. The surface
resistivity and moisture content can be greatly altered, resulting in print-quality problems. Hard
surface coatings increase wear on the rollers and media guides. All chemically treated media
must meet Hewlett-Packard specifications for fusing compatibility.
Synthetic media
Synthetic medias (those manufactured from man-made fibers) do not perform as well as bond
media in any printer, especially Hewlett-Packard LaserJet printers. All synthetic media must meet
Hewlett-Packard specifications, especially for caliper and fusing compatibility.
Coated media
Do not use coated media. Most coated media does not meet specifications for fusing
compatibility and other specifications for HP LaserJet printers.
Other special media
1
Odd sizes. Check minimum and maximum supported sizes in chapter 2.
2
Carbonless media. No carbon required (NCR) media is not supported by HP LaserJet
printers.
3
Recycled media. Choose recycled media that meets Hewlett-Packard specifications. Note
that recycled media might not be as bright as indicated in the specifications. Hewlett-Packard
recommends that recycled media contain no more than 5 percent groundwood. See chapter
2 for testing information.
222 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Evaluate media use practices
Handling and loading
Often differences in techniques, missed steps, or media-handling methods are responsible for
problems. Be sure the media is loaded correctly in the printer.
Note
Make sure that all printer users are observing these guidelines.
Printer maintenance
General cleanliness of the printer is the most important part of printer maintenance. Printers
using media that creates a lot of dust and debris might require an aggressive maintenance
schedule. Media dust accumulates in the following areas:
●
pickup rollers
●
media guides
Take extra time to clean and inspect the paper path. If problems continue after cleaning, inspect
for wear or damage.
Media stacking
Consider the following guidelines when advising the customer about stacking media:
●
Do not store cartons of reams directly on the floor; cartons should be placed on a pallet or on
shelves.
●
Do not stack cartons more than six on top of one another.
●
Stack each carton squarely on top of the other.
●
Stack each carton upright.
●
Do not store individual reams in such a manner that they will curl or warp along the edges.
●
Do not place anything on top of stored media.
●
Do not place the media close to heating or air conditioning vents or open windows.
Evaluate environmental conditions
Printing environment
Ideally, the printing environment should be at room temperature and not too dry or too humid.
Print media absorbs and loses moisture rapidly.
Temperature extremes and excessive humidity can damage print media. Heat causes the
moisture in the media to evaporate. Cold causes the moisture in the media to condense. Heating
systems and air conditioners remove most humidity. When media loses moisture, streaks and
smudging result. When paper absorbs moisture, light print and dropouts result.
ENWW
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 223
Media storage environment
Media storage environmental conditions directly affect the feed operation.
Note
Do not purchase more media than can be easily used in a short time (about 3 months). Media
stored for long periods experiences heat and moisture extremes that can be damaging. Planning
is important to prevent damage to a large supply of media.
Hewlett-Packard neither warrants nor recommends the use of a particular brand of paper or print
media. Media properties are subject to manufacturing changes Hewllett-Packard has no control
over such changes. The customer assumes all responsibility for the quality and performance of
media. Although testing media helps to characterize its performance, process quality control by
the manufacturer.
Unconverted media in sealed reams can remain stable for several months before use. Converted
media has greater potential for environmental damage, especially if it is not wrapped with a
moisture-proof barrier.
The media storage environment should be maintained to ensure optimum printer performance.
The required condition is 20 degrees to 24 degrees C (68 degrees to 75 degrees F), with a
relative humidity of 45 percent to 55 percent. The following guidelines should be considered
when evaluating the customer’s media storage environment:
●
Media should be stored at or near room temperature.
●
The air should not be too dry or too humid.
●
The best way to store an opened ream of paper is to rewrap it tightly in its moisture-proof
wrapping. If the printer environment is subject to extremes, unwrap only the amount of media
to be used during the day’s operation to prevent unwanted moisture changes.
224 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Communication troubleshooting
Communications check
Note
Communication problems are normally the customer’s responsibility. Time spent attempting to
resolve these problems might not be covered by the Hewlett-Packard warranty.
Refer the customer to the network administrator for assistance in troubleshooting network
problems.
Test message
After the printer is installed, verify communications between the printer and the IBM-compatible
computer. Enter the following at the DOS prompt:
C:\DIR>LPT1 ENTER (for printing to parallel port #1)
The printer should print a directory listing of the C: \ directory.
Note
Some Windows operating systems do not run true DOS. Consequently, printing the directory may
not accomplish a true test of the communication between the printer and the computer.
EIO troubleshooting
Note
If the printer has been turned on for at least 10 minutes, it will not recognize a LAN cable plugged
into the Jetdirect server until you turn off the printer and then turn it on again.
Before attempting to troubleshoot a network problem or notifying the network consultant of a
problem, always print a configuration page.
See the HP Jetdirect Print Server Software Installation Guide for detailed explanations of
network issues (go to http://www.hp.com/go/Jetdirect).
Jetdirect configuration
ENWW
●
If the EIO Jetdirect card has started successfully and completed its internal diagnostics, the
I/O CARD READY message appears on the Jetdirect configuration page. If communication is
lost, an I/O NOT READY message appears followed by a two-digit error code. See the HP
Jetdirect Network Interface Configuration Guide for further details and recommended action
(go to http://www.hp.com/go/Jetdirect).
●
The “Network Statistics” column indicates that network activity has been occurring. Bad
packets, framing errors, unsendable packets, and collisions should be minimal. If a high
percentage (greater than one percent) of these occur, contact the network administrator. All
of the statistics are set to zero when the printer is turned off.
●
The “Novell Status” block should state the Novell printer server name to which the printer is
connected. If the node name reads “NPIxxxxxx” (xxxxxx=last six digits of the EIO’s LAN
address), the EIO card has not been configured for a Novell server. This could indicate that
the card is operating under an IPX protocol other than Novell. Consult with the network
administrator if the node name is not present.
●
In the TCP/IP protocol block, the default IP address is “0.0.0.0.” It is acceptable to operate
the printer with this default address. The error message “ARP DUPLICATE ADDRESS”
might appear in this block. This is also an acceptable error code if the TCP/IP protocol is not
being used. Check with the network administrator to determine the correct IP address for the
printer.
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 225
Troubleshooting tools
Repetitive defect ruler
Repetitive print defects are usually caused by a specific roller in the printer or the print cartridge.
Use the figure below to isolate the cause of repetitive print defects. Align the first occurrence of
the defect with the top of the “ruler” (at the top or bottom of the misprinted page), and measure to
the next occurrence of the defect to determine the roller in question. When the defect pattern
matches the pattern of the ruler, replace the indicated roller.
Initial occurrence of defect
Primary charging roller—38 mm (1.50 inches)
Transfer charging roller—44 mm (1.73 inches)
Developing roller—47 mm (1.85 inches)
Pressure roller—63 mm (2.48 inches)
Fuser film—75 mm (2.95 inches)
Photosensitive drum—95 mm (3.74 inches)
Figure 111.
Repetitive defect ruler
226 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Half-self-test functional check
The electrophotographic process can be subdivided into the following stages:
●
Cleaning (removes excess toner from drum surface)
●
Conditioning (places a uniform electrical charge on drum)
●
Writing (laser strikes surface of drum to create latent image)
●
Developing (forms the toner image on drum)
●
Transferring (charges transfer the image to paper)
●
Fusing (heat and pressure produces a permanent image)
The purpose of the half-self-test check is to determine which process is malfunctioning.
Performing a half-self-test functional check
1
Print a configuration page from tray 1.
2
Open the top cover after the trailing edge of the paper enters the printer. At this point, the
leading edge of the paper should have advanced beyond the print cartridge.
3
Remove the print cartridge.
4
Open the print cartridge drum shield to view the drum surface.
Interpreting the functional check
If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum’s surface, assume that the first four
functions of the electrophotographic process are functioning (cleaning, conditioning, writing, and
developing) and troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem.
If no image is present on the photosensitive drum, perform the drum rotation functional check.
ENWW
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 227
Performing a self test
To initiate a self test:
1
Turn off the printer.
2
Press
3
Release
4
Use
(UP arrow) or
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to SELF TEST, and then press
(SELECT).
The status lights cycle, the printer initializes, and then the printer prints a configuration page.
(SELECT) and hold it while turning on the printer.
(SELECT) when all three status lights are lit.
Performing a paper path test
To initiate a paper path test:
1
Press
(SELECT).
2
Use
(UP arrow) or
(SELECT).
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to DIAGNOSTICS, and then press
3
Use
(UP arrow) or
(SELECT).
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to PAPER PATH TEST, and then press
4
Use
(UP arrow) or
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to PRINT TEST PAGE, and then press
(SELECT). The printer produces a test page.
Drum-rotation functional check
The photosensitive drum, located in the print cartridge, must rotate for the print process to work.
The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the main drive assembly. To verify whether the
drum is rotating, perform a drum-rotation functional check.
To perform a drum-rotation functional check
Note
1
Open the top cover.
2
Remove the print cartridge.
3
Mark the cartridge drive gear with a felt-tipped marker. Note the position of the mark.
4
Install the print cartridge and close the top cover. The start-up sequence should rotate the
drum enough to move the mark.
5
Open the printer and inspect the gear that was marked in step 3. Verify that the mark moved.
If the mark did not move, inspect the main drive assembly to make sure it is meshing with the
print cartridge gears. If the drive gears function and the drum does not move, replace the
print cartridge.
This test is especially important when the customer is using refilled print cartridges.
228 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Resetting the printer
Cold reset
A cold reset returns the control panel settings to the default factory settings.
Note
A cold reset also resets EIO. To retain EIO settings, remove the EIO card before performing a cold
reset.
To perform a cold reset, complete the following steps:
1
Turn off the printer.
2
Press and hold
3
When all three status lights are lit, release
4
Use
(SELECT), and turn on the printer.
(UP arrow) or
(SELECT).
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to COLD RESET, and press
(SELECT).
NVRAM initialization
Note
Before performing a hard-disk initialization, print a menu map and a configuration page. Use the
information on the configuration page to reset any customer-set printer configuration values that
the hard disk initialization procedure changes.
Performing an NVRAM initialization clears the NVRAM of all control panel settings including the
following:
●
Model number
●
Serial number
●
Service ID
●
Usage data (such as page counts, number of copies count, maintenance counts),
●
Event log
To perform an NVRAM initialization, complete the following steps:
1
Turn off the printer.
2
Press and hold
3
When all three status lights are lit, release
4
Press PAUSE/RESUME. The first item of a menu appears.
5
Use
(DOWN arrow), and turn on the printer.
(UP arrow) or
(DOWN arrow) and press
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to NVRAM INIT, and press
(UP arrow).
(SELECT).
Setting the language
To set the printer control panel display language, perform the following steps:
ENWW
1
Turn off the printer.
2
Press
3
Release
(SELECT) when all three status lights are lit. The lights cycle and the HP logo
appears on the control panel display. The message INITIALIZING appears, and then a menu
appears.
4
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to SELECT LANGUAGE, and then press
Use
(UP arrow) or
(SELECT). The control panel displays a list of available languages.
5
Use
(UP arrow) or
(DOWN arrow) to scroll to the correct language, and then press
(SELECT) to save the selection.
(SELECT) and hold it while turning on the printer.
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 229
Reference diagrams
2
3
2
4
2
5
2
2
6
2
7
2
8
2
1
Figure 112.
General printer-component locations
1
Pressure roller
2
Fuser
3
Fuser film
4
Transfer roller
5
Tray 1 pickup roller
6
Tray 1 separation pad
7
Tray 2 pickup roller
8
Tray 2 separation pad
230 Troubleshooting
ENWW
2
2
3
2
1
Figure 113.
ENWW
Locations of switches
1
Power switch
2
Engine test button
3
Interlock (SW1)
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 231
2
3
2
2
4
2
5
2
6
2
7
2
1
Figure 114.
Locations of sensors
1
Rear output bin sensor (PS502)
2
Delivery sensor (PS2301)
3
Reversed media sensor (PS501)
4
Top-of-page sensor (PS2305)
5
Automatic duplexer pickup sensor (PS503)
6
Tray 2 media sensor (PS1305)
7
Tray 1 media sensor (PS3908)
232 Troubleshooting
ENWW
2
1
2
2
3
Figure 115.
ENWW
Locations of solenoid
1
Automatic duplexer solenoid (SL3)
2
Tray 1 pickup solenoid (SL2)
3
Tray 2 pickup solenoid (SL1)
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 233
2
2
1
Figure 116.
2
3
Location of motors and fans
1
Fan (FM1)
2
Reversing motor (M2)
3
Main motor (M1)
234 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Figure 117.
ENWW
Engine controller PCB
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 235
Figure 118.
Power supply PCB
236 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Figure 119.
ENWW
General circuit diagram (1 of 2)
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 237
Figure 120.
General circuit diagram (2 of 2)
238 Troubleshooting
ENWW
Figure 121.
ENWW
General timing chart
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 239
240 Troubleshooting
ENWW
8
Parts and diagrams
Chapter contents
Ordering parts and supplies and getting support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Consumables, accessories, and supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common fasteners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illustrations and parts lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Covers and panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Top cover assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal components (1 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal components (2 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal components (3 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal components (4 of 4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-supply assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pickup assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCA locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
250-sheet feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
500-sheet feeder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alphabetical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numerical parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENWW
242
242
243
244
245
246
246
248
250
250
252
254
256
258
260
262
263
264
264
266
268
273
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 241
Ordering parts and supplies and getting support
Parts
How to use the parts lists and diagrams
The figures in this chapter illustrate the major subassemblies in the printer and their component
parts. A table accompanies each exploded-view diagram. Each table lists reference numbers for
the field-replaceable units (FRU) that appear in the diagram, along with their part numbers and
names. Parts for which no part numbers are listed are not FRUs and cannot be ordered.
Note
When looking for an electrical part, pay careful attention to the voltage listed in the description
column to ensure that the part number is correct for your printer model.
Ordering
Order replacement parts from HP Services. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/parts/ for information
about ordering service parts in your area. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/partsinfo/ for the online
HP service parts identification tool (HP partSurfer).All standard part numbers listed are stocked
and can be ordered from HP’s Customer Services and Support Center.
Support
In addition to the technical support websites listed below, the following website contains answers
to frequently asked questions:
http://www.hp.com/support/lj2300
Table 27. Technical support websites
HP Connect Online (for http://www.connect-online.hp.com
HP partners)
Hp Connect Online is an Internet site that is created exclusively for our partners.
Partners can easily find all of the HP information needed for daily business.
HP Customer Care
Online (software
drivers, support
documentation, and
answers to frequently
asked questions)
http://www.hp.com
Select your country/region in the “select a country or region” field located on the
web page.
HP Technical Training
(classes and
schedules)
U.S.: http://www.partner.americas.hp.com
Canada: http://www.canada.hp.com
Asia and Pacific countries/regions: http://partnercare.asiapac.hp.com
Latin America: http://www.conecta.latinamerica.hp.com
Parts (parts
information)
http://www.hp.com/go/parts/
http://www.hp.com/go/partsinfo/
http://www.partsurfer.hp.com
Supplies/paper
(ordering information)
U.S. http://www.hp.com/go/orderssupplies-na
Canada: http://www.hp.ca/catalog/supplies
Europe: http://www.hp.com/go/supplies
Asia and Pacific countries/regions: http://www.hp.com/paper
242 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
Consumables, accessories, and supplies
Table 28. Consumables, accessories, and supplies
Product number
Part number
Description
Q2610-60001
Smart print cartridge
Consumable items
Q2610A
Cables
C2950A
2 m (5 ft) parallel cable (IEEE-1284)
C2951A
3 m (9 ft) parallel cable (IEEE-1284)
C6518A CPC
USB
100-pin memory (DIMMS)
C7842A
8 MB
C7843A
16 MB
C7845A
32 MB
Q2651-67902
DIMM kit, HP LaserJet 2300L printer
Q2651-67903
DIMM kit, HP LaserJet 2300 printer
Q2677-67902
DIMM kit, HP LaserJet 2300n printer
Q2677-67903
DIMM kit, HP LaserJet 2300d, 2300dn, and 2300 dtn
printers
Network connectivity
J4169A
J4169-69001
J4135A
HP JetDirect 615N Fast Ethernet (10/100 Base-TX [RJ-45])
USB
Media handling
RM1-0350-000CN
Tray 2 or 250-sheet feeder media tray replacement
C4793-67901
250-sheet feeder and tray assembly
C7065-67901
500-sheet feeder and tray assembly
Reference materials
Q2472-90908
HP LaserJet 2300 series printer service manual
5851-1468
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide
5021-0377
HP PCL/PJL Reference Set
5969-6818
HP JetDirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide
5969-3412
HP JetDirect Print Server JetAdmin Setup Guide
Q2472-67901
Packaging kit
Miscellaneous
ENWW
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 243
Common fasteners
Table 29. Common fasteners
Example
Description
Sizes
Uses
Screw
M3 by 6 mm
M4 by 8 mm
To hold plastic to plastic
Screw, tapping
M3 by 4 mm
M3 by 6 mm
M4 by 6 mm
M4 by 12 mm
To hold plastic to metal
(excluding the control panel)
Screw, pan head
M4 by 10 mm
To hold plastic to plastic
Screw, w/washer
M3 by 6 mm
M3 by 8 mm
M3 by 7 mm
M4 by 6 mm
M4 by 12 mm
To hold plastic to metal
(excluding the covers)
Screw, truss head
M3 by 6 mm
M3 by 8 mm
M4 by 8 mm
M4 by 20 mm
To hold sheet metal to metal
(excluding the formatter)
E-ring
244 Parts and diagrams
To hold gears in place
ENWW
Illustrations and parts lists
Assembly locations
Top cover assembly
Power supply assembly
Engine controller assembly
Drive assembly
Fuser
Registration
assembly
Tray 2
Figure 122.
ENWW
Assembly locations
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 245
Covers
Covers and panels
Figure 123.
Covers and panels
246 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
Table 30. Covers and panels
ENWW
Ref
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Rear cover assembly
RM1-0367-000CN
1
1A
Bin extension
RB2-6286-000CN
1
1B
Spring, torsion
RC1-0999-000CN
2
1C
Roller, guide
RB2-6288-000CN
2
1D
Rear output bin
RB2-6287-000CN
1
1E
Guide, rear output
RB2-6401-000CN
1
2
Cover, DIMM
RM1-0329-000CN
1
2A
Cover, I/O
RB2-6283-000CN
1
3
Cover, front
RC1-1013-000CN
1
4
Cable, panel
RG1-4314-000CN
1
5
Control panel
RH6-0226-000CN
1
6
Tray 1 cover assembly
RG5-5575-000CN
1
6A
Tray 1 extension 1
RB2-6404-000CN
1
6B
Tray 1 extension 2
RB2-3036-000CN
1
7
Tray 1 assembly
RM1-0353-000CN
1
8
Left cover assembly
RG5-5549-000CN
1
8A
Button, power switch
RB2-6294-000CN
1
8B
Spring, compression
RB2-2860-000CN
1
9
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
XB4-7401-007CN
2
10
Screw, tapping, truss head, M4x14
XB4-7401-407CN
2
11
Screw, TP, M3x6
XA9-1223-000CN
1
12
Screw, w/washer, M3x6
XB6-7300-607CN
1
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 247
Top cover assembly
Figure 124.
Top cover assembly
248 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
Table 31. Top cover assembly
ENWW
Ref
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Top cover assembly
RM1-0328-000CN
1
1A
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
XB4-7401-007CN
1
2
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
XB4-7401-007CN
2
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 249
Internal components
Internal components (1 of 4)
Figure 125.
Internal components (1 of 4)
250 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
Table 32. Internal components (1 of 4)
ENWW
Ref
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Lever, sensor
RB2-2836-000CN
1
2
Spring, torsion
RB2-2837-000CN
1
3
Mount, fan
RB2-6255-000CN
1
4
Static charge eliminator
RC1-0911-000CN
1
5
Plate, grounding
RC1-0917-000CN
1
6
Mount, laser/scanner
RC1-1001-000CN
1
7
Guide, cable
RC1-1002-000CN
1
8
Duct
RC1-1003-000CN
1
9
Guide, flat cable
RC1-1019-000CN
1
10
FG cable assembly
RG1-4310-000CN
1
11
Paper feeder cable
RG5-5598-000CN
1
11A
I/F cable
RG5-5599-000CN
1
11B
Grounding cable
RG5-5600-000CN
1
12
Flat cable, I/F
RH2-5580-000CN
1
13
Motor, dc (M1)
RH7-1587-000CN
1
14
Fan
RH7-1591-000CN
1
15
Switch (SW1)
RH7-6051-000CN
1
16
Laser/scanner
RM1-0313-000CN
1
17
E-label reader assembly
RM1-0335-000CN
1
18
Screw, TP, M3x8
XA9-1160-000CN
4
19
Screw, TP, M4x12
XA9-1273-000CN
4
20
Screw, w/washer, M3x6
XB2-7300-607CN
8
21
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
XB4-7401-007CN
13
22
Screw, PH M3x4
XB6-7300-407CN
3
23
Drive assembly
RM1-0334-000CN
1
24
Fuser (110-127V)
RM1-0354-000CN
1
Fuser (220-240V)
RM1-0355-000CN
1
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 251
Internal components (2 of 4)
Figure 126.
Internal components (2 of 4)
252 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
Table 33. Internal components (2 of 4)
ENWW
Ref
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Cap, continuity
RA0-1068-000CN
1
2
Guide, cartridge, right
RB2-2830-020CN
1
3
Guide, cartridge, left
RB2-2831-020CN
1
4
Spring, compression
RB2-2832-000CN
1
5
Spring, torsion
RB2-2843-000CN
1
6
Rod, jam clearing
RB2-6250-000CN
1
7
Lever, jam clearing
RB2-6251-000CN
1
8
Arm, sensor
RB2-6264-000CN
1
9
Foot, rubber
RB2-6297-000CN
4
10
Bushing, transfer, right
RC1-0922-000CN
1
11
Tray 1 damper assembly
RC1-1038-000CN
1
12
Gear, 26T
RC1-1039-000CN
1
13
Gear, 29T
RC1-1040-000CN
1
14
Top output bin delivery roller assembly
RG5-5542-050CN
2
14A
Roller, top output bin, lower 2
RB2-6277-000CN
1
14B
Roller, top output bin, lower 1
RB2-6400-000CN
1
15
Transfer roller assembly
RM1-0338-000CN
1
16
Tray 1 pickup assembly
RM1-0346-000CN
1
16A
Roller, pickup
RC1-0945-000CN
1
17
Top output bin delivery roller assembly
RM1-0370-000CN
2
17A
Roller, face-down lower 1
RB2-6400-000CN
1
18
Top output bin delivery roller assembly
RM1-0371-000CN
1
19
Gear, 14T
RS6-0445-000CN
1
20
Spring, compression
RS6-2375-000CN
4
21
Gear, 15T
RU5-0168-000CN
1
22
Spring, compression
RU5-2109-000CN
1
23
Spring, tension
RU5-2112-000CN
1
24
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
XB4-7401-007CN
12
25
Registration assembly
RM1-0347-000CN
1
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 253
Internal components (3 of 4)
Figure 127.
Internal components (3 of 4)
254 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
Table 34. Internal components (3 of 4)
ENWW
Ref
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Spring, leaf
RB2-6266-000CN
1
2
Hinge, left
RB2-6405-000CN
1
3
Hinge, right
RB2-6406-000CN
1
4
Plate, feeding, center
RC1-0912-000CN
1
5
Plate, feeding, left
RC1-0913-000CN
1
6
Plate, feeding, right
RC1-0914-000CN
1
7
Plate, feeding, front
RC1-0915-000CN
2
8
Plate, grounding
RC1-0916-000CN
1
9
Belt, paper feed
RC1-0918-000CN
3
10
Shaft, paper feed
RC1-0920-000CN
1
11
Pad, separation
RC1-0939-000CN
1
12
Pulley
RC1-0933-000CN
3
13
Cable guide assembly
RM1-0324-000CN
1
14
Gear assembly
RM1-0337-000CN
1
15
Separation pad assembly
RM1-0345-000CN
1
16
Spring, tension
RS6-2030-000CN
2
17
Gear, 27T
RU5-0155-000CN
1
18
Gear, 14T
RU5-0156-000CN
1
19
Shaft, paper feed
RU5-0158-000CN
1
20
Spring, compression
RU5-2113-000CN
1
21
Photosensor TLP1242
WG8-5382-000CN
1
22
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
XB4-7401-007CN
5
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 255
Internal components (4 of 4)
Figure 128.
Internal components (4 of 4)
256 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
Table 35. Internal components (4 of 4)
ENWW
Ref
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Hinge, feed guide
RB2-6249-000CN
1
2
Spring, compression
RB2-6262-000CN
1
3
Spring, compression
RB2-6263-000CN
1
4
Spring, compression
RB2-6271-000CN
1
5
Sheet, leakage-prevention
RC1-0919-000CN
1
6
Reverse guide assembly
RG5-5548-000CN
1
7
Access plate feed guide assembly
RG5-5554-030CN
1
8
Feed roller assembly
RG5-5555-000CN
1
9
Solenoid
RH7-5279-000CN
1
10
Access plate solenoid assembly
RM1-0331-000CN
1
10A
Screw, RS, M3x6
XA9-0686-000CN
1
11
Position guide assembly
RM1-0333-000CN
1
12
Inlet cable assembly
RM1-0342-000CN
1
13
Spring, compression
RU5-2107-000CN
1
14
Spring, compression
RU5-2108-000CN
1
15
Screw, w/washer, M4x12
XA9-1206-000CN
2
16
Screw, w/washer, M3x6
XB2-7300-607CN
1
17
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
XB4-7401-007CN
7
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 257
Power-supply assembly
Figure 129.
Power-supply assembly
258 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
Table 36. Power-supply assembly
Ref
Description
Part number
Qty
Power supply assembly (110-127V)
RM1-0340-000CN
1
Power supply assembly (220-240V)
RM1-0341-000CN
1
Power supply PCA (110-127V)
RG1-4306-000CN
1
Power supply PCA (220-240V)
RG1-4329-000CN
1
1A
Spacer, PCA
RC1-0931-000CN
1
1B
Fuse (110-127V)
WD1-0268-000CN
1
Fuse (220-240V)
RH3-8006-000CN
1
2
Sheet, insulation
RC1-0930-000CN
1
3
Holder, sensor, lever
RL1-0158-000CN
1
4
PCA
VT2-0012-005CN
1
5
Screw, w/washer, M3x8
XA9-1226-000CN
4
1
ENWW
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 259
Pickup assembly
Figure 130.
Pickup assembly
260 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
Table 37. Pickup assembly
Ref
ENWW
Description
Part number
Quantity
Pickup assembly
RM1-0332-000CN
1
1
Roller
RB2-2892-000CN
2
2
Bushing, right
RB2-2895-000CN
1
3
Bushing, left
RB2-2896-000CN
1
4
Pickup roller
RB2-6304-000CN
1
5
Arm, paper sensor
RB2-6310-000CN
1
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 261
Engine controller
Figure 131.
Engine controller
Table 38. Engine controller
Ref
Description
Part number
Qty
Engine controller assembly
RM1-0339-000CN
1
1
Engine controller PCA
RG1-4307-000CN
1
2
Screw, w/washer, M3x8
XA9-1226-000CN
1
262 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
PCA locations
Figure 132.
PCA locations
Table 39. PCA locations
Ref
Description
Part number
Quantity
1
Engine controller PCA
RG1-4307-000CN
1
2
Power supply PCA (110-127V)
RG1-4306-000CN
1
Power supply PCA (220-240V)
RG1-4329-000CN
1
Formatter
Q1395-60001
1
3
ENWW
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 263
Trays
250-sheet feeder
Figure 133.
250-sheet feeder
264 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
Table 40. 250-sheet feeder
Ref
ENWW
Description
Part number
Qty
250-sheet feeder
C4793-67901
1
Tray 2 or 250-sheet feeder (media tray only)
RM1-0350-000CN
1
1
Pickup roller
RB2-6304-000CN
1
2
Roller
RB2-2892-000CN
2
3
Bushing, right
RB2-2895-000CN
1
4
Bushing, left
RB2-2896-000CN
1
14
Separation pad
RC1-0954-000CN
1
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 265
500-sheet feeder
Figure 134.
500-sheet feeder
266 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
Table 41. 500-sheet feeder
Ref
ENWW
Description
Part number
Qty
500-sheet feeder
C7065-67901
1
1
Pickup roller
RB2-6304-000CN
1
2
Roller
RB2-2892-000CN
2
3
Bushing, right
RB2-2895-000CN
1
4
Bushing, left
RB2-2896-000CN
1
15
Pad, separation
RB2-9960-000CN
1
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 267
Alphabetical parts list
Table 42. Alphabetical parts list
Description
Part number
Quantity Figure
250-sheet feeder
C4793-67901
1
133
500-sheet feeder
C7065-67901
1
134
Access plate feed guide assembly
RG5-5554-030CN
1
128
7
Access plate solenoid assembly
RM1-0331-000CN
1
128
10
Arm, paper sensor
RB2-6310-000CN
1
130
5
Arm, sensor
RB2-6264-000CN
1
126
8
Belt, paper feed
RC1-0918-000CN
3
127
9
Bin extension
RB2-6286-000CN
1
123
1A
Bushing, left
RB2-2896-000CN
1
130
3
Bushing, left
RB2-2896-000CN
1
133
4
Bushing, left
RB2-2896-000CN
1
134
4
Bushing, right
RB2-2895-000CN
1
130
2
Bushing, right
RB2-2895-000CN
1
133
3
Bushing, right
RB2-2895-000CN
1
134
3
Bushing, transfer, right
RC1-0922-000CN
1
126
10
Button, power switch
RB2-6294-000CN
1
123
8A
Cable guide assembly
RM1-0324-000CN
1
127
13
Cable, panel
RG1-4314-000CN
1
123
4
Cap, continuity
RA0-1068-000CN
1
126
1
Control panel
RH6-0226-000CN
1
123
5
Cover, DIMM
RM1-0329-000CN
1
123
2
Cover, front
RC1-1013-000CN
1
123
3
Cover, I/O
RB2-6283-000CN
1
123
2A
Drive assembly
RM1-0334-000CN
1
125
23
Duct
RC1-1003-000CN
1
125
8
E-label reader assembly
RM1-0335-000CN
1
125
17
Engine controller assembly
RM1-0339-000CN
1
131
Engine controller PCA
RG1-4307-000CN
1
131
1
Engine controller PCA
RG1-4307-000CN
1
132
1
Fan
RH7-1591-000CN
1
125
14
Feed roller assembly
RG5-5555-000CN
1
128
8
FG cable assembly
RG1-4310-000CN
1
125
10
Flat cable, I/F
RH2-5580-000CN
1
125
12
Foot, rubber
RB2-6297-000CN
4
126
9
Formatter
Q1395-60001
1
132
3
Fuse (110-127V)
WD1-0268-000CN
1
129
1B
268 Parts and diagrams
Ref.
ENWW
Table 42. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
ENWW
Description
Part number
Quantity Figure
Ref.
Fuse (220-240V)
RH3-8006-000CN
1
129
1B
Fuser (110-127V)
RM1-0354-000CN
1
125
24
Fuser (220-240V)
RM1-0355-000CN
1
125
24
Gear assembly
RM1-0337-000CN
1
127
14
Gear, 14T
RS6-0445-000CN
1
126
19
Gear, 14T
RU5-0156-000CN
1
127
18
Gear, 15T
RU5-0168-000CN
1
126
21
Gear, 26T
RC1-1039-000CN
1
126
12
Gear, 27T
RU5-0155-000CN
1
127
17
Gear, 29T
RC1-1040-000CN
1
126
13
Grounding cable
RG5-5600-000CN
1
125
11B
Guide, cable
RC1-1002-000CN
1
125
7
Guide, cartridge, left
RB2-2831-020CN
1
126
3
Guide, cartridge, right
RB2-2830-020CN
1
126
2
Guide, flat cable
RC1-1019-000CN
1
125
9
Guide, rear output
RB2-6401-000CN
1
123
1E
Hinge, feed guide
RB2-6249-000CN
1
128
1
Hinge, left
RB2-6405-000CN
1
127
2
Hinge, right
RB2-6406-000CN
1
127
3
Holder, sensor, lever
RL1-0158-000CN
1
129
3
I/F cable
RG5-5599-000CN
1
125
11A
Inlet cable assembly
RM1-0342-000CN
1
128
12
Laser/scanner
RM1-0313-000CN
1
125
16
Left cover assembly
RG5-5549-000CN
1
123
8
Lever, jam clearing
RB2-6251-000CN
1
126
7
Lever, sensor
RB2-2836-000CN
1
125
1
Motor, dc (M1)
RH7-1587-000CN
1
125
13
Mount, fan
RB2-6255-000CN
1
125
3
Mount, laser/scanner
RC1-1001-000CN
1
125
6
Pad, separation
RB2-9960-000CN
1
134
15
Pad, separation
RC1-0939-000CN
1
127
11
Paper feeder cable
RG5-5598-000CN
1
125
11
PCA
VT2-0012-005CN
1
129
4
Photosensor TLP1242
WG8-5382-000CN
1
127
21
Pickup assembly
RM1-0332-000CN
1
130
Pickup roller
RB2-6304-000CN
1
130
4
Pickup roller
RB2-6304-000CN
1
133
1
Pickup roller
RB2-6304-000CN
1
134
1
Plate, feeding, center
RC1-0912-000CN
1
127
4
Plate, feeding, front
RC1-0915-000CN
2
127
7
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 269
Table 42. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Quantity Figure
Ref.
Plate, feeding, left
RC1-0913-000CN
1
127
5
Plate, feeding, right
RC1-0914-000CN
1
127
6
Plate, grounding
RC1-0916-000CN
1
127
8
Plate, grounding
RC1-0917-000CN
1
125
5
Position guide assembly
RM1-0333-000CN
1
128
11
Power supply assembly (110-127V)
RM1-0340-000CN
1
129
Power supply assembly (220-240V)
RM1-0341-000CN
1
129
Power supply PCA (110-127V)
RG1-4306-000CN
1
129
1
Power supply PCA (110-127V)
RG1-4306-000CN
1
132
2
Power supply PCA (220-240V)
RG1-4329-000CN
1
129
1
Power supply PCA (220-240V)
RG1-4329-000CN
1
132
2
Pulley
RC1-0933-000CN
3
127
12
Rear cover assembly
RM1-0367-000CN
1
123
1
Rear output bin
RB2-6287-000CN
1
123
1D
Registration assembly
RM1-0347-000CN
1
126
25
Reverse guide assembly
RG5-5548-000CN
1
128
6
Rod, jam clearing
RB2-6250-000CN
1
126
6
Roller
RB2-2892-000CN
2
130
1
Roller
RB2-2892-000CN
2
133
2
Roller
RB2-2892-000CN
2
134
2
Roller, face-down lower 1
RB2-6400-000CN
1
126
17A
Roller, guide
RB2-6288-000CN
2
123
1C
Roller, pickup
RC1-0945-000CN
1
126
16A
Roller, top output bin, lower 1
RB2-6400-000CN
1
126
14B
Roller, top output bin, lower 2
RB2-6277-000CN
1
126
14A
Screw, PH M3x4
XB6-7300-407CN
3
125
22
Screw, RS, M3x6
XA9-0686-000CN
1
128
10A
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
XB4-7401-007CN
2
123
9
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
XB4-7401-007CN
1
124
1A
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
XB4-7401-007CN
2
124
2
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
XB4-7401-007CN
13
125
21
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
XB4-7401-007CN
12
126
24
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
XB4-7401-007CN
5
127
22
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
XB4-7401-007CN
7
128
17
Screw, tapping, truss head, M4x14
XB4-7401-407CN
2
123
10
Screw, TP, M3x6
XA9-1223-000CN
1
123
11
Screw, TP, M3x8
XA9-1160-000CN
4
125
18
Screw, TP, M4x12
XA9-1273-000CN
4
125
19
Screw, w/washer, M3x6
XB2-7300-607CN
8
125
20
Screw, w/washer, M3x6
XB2-7300-607CN
1
128
16
270 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
Table 42. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
ENWW
Description
Part number
Quantity Figure
Ref.
Screw, w/washer, M3x6
XB6-7300-607CN
1
123
12
Screw, w/washer, M3x8
XA9-1226-000CN
4
129
5
Screw, w/washer, M3x8
XA9-1226-000CN
1
131
2
Screw, w/washer, M4x12
XA9-1206-000CN
2
128
15
Separation pad
RC1-0954-000CN
1
133
14
Separation pad assembly
RM1-0345-000CN
1
127
15
Shaft, paper feed
RC1-0920-000CN
1
127
10
Shaft, paper feed
RU5-0158-000CN
1
127
19
Sheet, insulation
RC1-0930-000CN
1
129
2
Sheet, leakage-prevention
RC1-0919-000CN
1
128
5
Solenoid
RH7-5279-000CN
1
128
9
Spacer, PCA
RC1-0931-000CN
1
129
1A
Spring, compression
RB2-2832-000CN
1
126
4
Spring, compression
RB2-2860-000CN
1
123
8B
Spring, compression
RB2-6262-000CN
1
128
2
Spring, compression
RB2-6263-000CN
1
128
3
Spring, compression
RB2-6271-000CN
1
128
4
Spring, compression
RS6-2375-000CN
4
126
20
Spring, compression
RU5-2107-000CN
1
128
13
Spring, compression
RU5-2108-000CN
1
128
14
Spring, compression
RU5-2109-000CN
1
126
22
Spring, compression
RU5-2113-000CN
1
127
20
Spring, leaf
RB2-6266-000CN
1
127
1
Spring, tension
RS6-2030-000CN
2
127
16
Spring, tension
RU5-2112-000CN
1
126
23
Spring, torsion
RB2-2837-000CN
1
125
2
Spring, torsion
RB2-2843-000CN
1
126
5
Spring, torsion
RC1-0999-000CN
2
123
1B
Static charge eliminator
RC1-0911-000CN
1
125
4
Switch (SW1)
RH7-6051-000CN
1
125
15
Top cover assembly
RM1-0328-000CN
1
124
1
Top output bin delivery roller assembly
RG5-5542-050CN
2
126
14
Top output bin delivery roller assembly
RM1-0370-000CN
2
126
17
Top output bin delivery roller assembly
RM1-0371-000CN
1
126
18
Transfer roller assembly
RM1-0338-000CN
1
126
15
Tray 1 assembly
RM1-0353-000CN
1
123
7
Tray 1 cover assembly
RG5-5575-000CN
1
123
6
Tray 1 damper assembly
RC1-1038-000CN
1
126
11
Tray 1 extension 1
RB2-6404-000CN
1
123
6A
Tray 1 extension 2
RB2-3036-000CN
1
123
6B
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 271
Table 42. Alphabetical parts list (continued)
Description
Part number
Quantity Figure
Ref.
Tray 1 pickup assembly
RM1-0346-000CN
1
16
Tray 2 or 250-sheet feeder (media tray only) RM1-0350-000CN
1
272 Parts and diagrams
126
ENWW
Numerical parts list
Table 43. Numerical parts list
ENWW
Part number
Description
Quantity Figure
Ref.
C4793-67901
250-sheet feeder
1
133
C7065-67901
500-sheet feeder
1
134
Q1395-60001
Formatter
1
132
3
RA0-1068-000CN
Cap, continuity
1
126
1
RB2-2830-020CN
Guide, cartridge, right
1
126
2
RB2-2831-020CN
Guide, cartridge, left
1
126
3
RB2-2832-000CN
Spring, compression
1
126
4
RB2-2836-000CN
Lever, sensor
1
125
1
RB2-2837-000CN
Spring, torsion
1
125
2
RB2-2843-000CN
Spring, torsion
1
126
5
RB2-2860-000CN
Spring, compression
1
123
8B
RB2-2892-000CN
Roller
2
130
1
RB2-2892-000CN
Roller
2
133
2
RB2-2892-000CN
Roller
2
134
2
RB2-2895-000CN
Bushing, right
1
130
2
RB2-2895-000CN
Bushing, right
1
133
3
RB2-2895-000CN
Bushing, right
1
134
3
RB2-2896-000CN
Bushing, left
1
130
3
RB2-2896-000CN
Bushing, left
1
133
4
RB2-2896-000CN
Bushing, left
1
134
4
RB2-3036-000CN
Tray 1 extension 2
1
123
6B
RB2-6249-000CN
Hinge, feed guide
1
128
1
RB2-6250-000CN
Rod, jam clearing
1
126
6
RB2-6251-000CN
Lever, jam clearing
1
126
7
RB2-6255-000CN
Mount, fan
1
125
3
RB2-6262-000CN
Spring, compression
1
128
2
RB2-6263-000CN
Spring, compression
1
128
3
RB2-6264-000CN
Arm, sensor
1
126
8
RB2-6266-000CN
Spring, leaf
1
127
1
RB2-6271-000CN
Spring, compression
1
128
4
RB2-6277-000CN
Roller, top output bin, lower 2
1
126
14A
RB2-6283-000CN
Cover, I/O
1
123
2A
RB2-6286-000CN
Bin extension
1
123
1A
RB2-6287-000CN
Rear output bin
1
123
1D
RB2-6288-000CN
Roller, guide
2
123
1C
RB2-6294-000CN
Button, power switch
1
123
8A
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 273
Table 43. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Quantity Figure
Ref.
RB2-6297-000CN
Foot, rubber
4
126
9
RB2-6304-000CN
Pickup roller
1
130
4
RB2-6304-000CN
Pickup roller
1
133
1
RB2-6304-000CN
Pickup roller
1
134
1
RB2-6310-000CN
Arm, paper sensor
1
130
5
RB2-6400-000CN
Roller, face-down lower 1
1
126
17A
RB2-6400-000CN
Roller, top output bin, lower 1
1
126
14B
RB2-6401-000CN
Guide, rear output
1
123
1E
RB2-6404-000CN
Tray 1 extension 1
1
123
6A
RB2-6405-000CN
Hinge, left
1
127
2
RB2-6406-000CN
Hinge, right
1
127
3
RB2-9960-000CN
Pad, separation
1
134
15
RC1-0911-000CN
Static charge eliminator
1
125
4
RC1-0912-000CN
Plate, feeding, center
1
127
4
RC1-0913-000CN
Plate, feeding, left
1
127
5
RC1-0914-000CN
Plate, feeding, right
1
127
6
RC1-0915-000CN
Plate, feeding, front
2
127
7
RC1-0916-000CN
Plate, grounding
1
127
8
RC1-0917-000CN
Plate, grounding
1
125
5
RC1-0918-000CN
Belt, paper feed
3
127
9
RC1-0919-000CN
Sheet, leakage-prevention
1
128
5
RC1-0920-000CN
Shaft, paper feed
1
127
10
RC1-0922-000CN
Bushing, transfer, right
1
126
10
RC1-0930-000CN
Sheet, insulation
1
129
2
RC1-0931-000CN
Spacer, PCA
1
129
1A
RC1-0933-000CN
Pulley
3
127
12
RC1-0939-000CN
Pad, separation
1
127
11
RC1-0945-000CN
Roller, pickup
1
126
16A
RC1-0954-000CN
Separation pad
1
133
14
RC1-0999-000CN
Spring, torsion
2
123
1B
RC1-1001-000CN
Mount, laser/scanner
1
125
6
RC1-1002-000CN
Guide, cable
1
125
7
RC1-1003-000CN
Duct
1
125
8
RC1-1013-000CN
Cover, front
1
123
3
RC1-1019-000CN
Guide, flat cable
1
125
9
RC1-1038-000CN
Tray 1 damper assembly
1
126
11
RC1-1039-000CN
Gear, 26T
1
126
12
RC1-1040-000CN
Gear, 29T
1
126
13
RG1-4306-000CN
Power supply PCA (110-127V)
1
129
1
RG1-4306-000CN
Power supply PCA (110-127V)
1
132
2
274 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
Table 43. Numerical parts list (continued)
ENWW
Part number
Description
Quantity Figure
Ref.
RG1-4307-000CN
Engine controller PCA
1
131
1
RG1-4307-000CN
Engine controller PCA
1
132
1
RG1-4310-000CN
FG cable assembly
1
125
10
RG1-4314-000CN
Cable, panel
1
123
4
RG1-4329-000CN
Power supply PCA (220-240V)
1
129
1
RG1-4329-000CN
Power supply PCA (220-240V)
1
132
2
RG5-5542-050CN
Top output bin delivery roller assembly
2
126
14
RG5-5548-000CN
Reverse guide assembly
1
128
6
RG5-5549-000CN
Left cover assembly
1
123
8
RG5-5554-030CN
Access plate feed guide assembly
1
128
7
RG5-5555-000CN
Feed roller assembly
1
128
8
RG5-5575-000CN
Tray 1 cover assembly
1
123
6
RG5-5598-000CN
Paper feeder cable
1
125
11
RG5-5599-000CN
I/F cable
1
125
11A
RG5-5600-000CN
Grounding cable
1
125
11B
RH2-5580-000CN
Flat cable, I/F
1
125
12
RH3-8006-000CN
Fuse (220-240V)
1
129
1B
RH6-0226-000CN
Control panel
1
123
5
RH7-1587-000CN
Motor, dc (M1)
1
125
13
RH7-1591-000CN
Fan
1
125
14
RH7-5279-000CN
Solenoid
1
128
9
RH7-6051-000CN
Switch (SW1)
1
125
15
RL1-0158-000CN
Holder, sensor, lever
1
129
3
RM1-0313-000CN
Laser/scanner
1
125
16
RM1-0324-000CN
Cable guide assembly
1
127
13
RM1-0328-000CN
Top cover assembly
1
124
1
RM1-0329-000CN
Cover, DIMM
1
123
2
RM1-0331-000CN
Access plate solenoid assembly
1
128
10
RM1-0332-000CN
Pickup assembly
1
130
RM1-0333-000CN
Position guide assembly
1
128
11
RM1-0334-000CN
Drive assembly
1
125
23
RM1-0335-000CN
E-label reader assembly
1
125
17
RM1-0337-000CN
Gear assembly
1
127
14
RM1-0338-000CN
Transfer roller assembly
1
126
15
RM1-0339-000CN
Engine controller assembly
1
131
RM1-0340-000CN
Power supply assembly (110-127V)
1
129
RM1-0341-000CN
Power supply assembly (220-240V)
1
129
RM1-0342-000CN
Inlet cable assembly
1
128
12
RM1-0345-000CN
Separation pad assembly
1
127
15
RM1-0346-000CN
Tray 1 pickup assembly
1
126
16
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 275
Table 43. Numerical parts list (continued)
Part number
Description
Quantity Figure
Ref.
RM1-0347-000CN
Registration assembly
1
126
25
RM1-0350-000CN
Tray 2 or 250-sheet feeder (media tray only) 1
RM1-0353-000CN
Tray 1 assembly
1
123
7
RM1-0354-000CN
Fuser (110-127V)
1
125
24
RM1-0355-000CN
Fuser (220-240V)
1
125
24
RM1-0367-000CN
Rear cover assembly
1
123
1
RM1-0370-000CN
Top output bin delivery roller assembly
2
126
17
RM1-0371-000CN
Top output bin delivery roller assembly
1
126
18
RS6-0445-000CN
Gear, 14T
1
126
19
RS6-2030-000CN
Spring, tension
2
127
16
RS6-2375-000CN
Spring, compression
4
126
20
RU5-0155-000CN
Gear, 27T
1
127
17
RU5-0156-000CN
Gear, 14T
1
127
18
RU5-0158-000CN
Shaft, paper feed
1
127
19
RU5-0168-000CN
Gear, 15T
1
126
21
RU5-2107-000CN
Spring, compression
1
128
13
RU5-2108-000CN
Spring, compression
1
128
14
RU5-2109-000CN
Spring, compression
1
126
22
RU5-2112-000CN
Spring, tension
1
126
23
RU5-2113-000CN
Spring, compression
1
127
20
VT2-0012-005CN
PCA
1
129
4
WD1-0268-000CN
Fuse (110-127V)
1
129
1B
WG8-5382-000CN
Photosensor TLP1242
1
127
21
XA9-0686-000CN
Screw, RS, M3x6
1
128
10A
XA9-1160-000CN
Screw, TP, M3x8
4
125
18
XA9-1206-000CN
Screw, w/washer, M4x12
2
128
15
XA9-1223-000CN
Screw, TP, M3x6
1
123
11
XA9-1226-000CN
Screw, w/washer, M3x8
4
129
5
XA9-1226-000CN
Screw, w/washer, M3x8
1
131
2
XA9-1273-000CN
Screw, TP, M4x12
4
125
19
XB2-7300-607CN
Screw, w/washer, M3x6
8
125
20
XB2-7300-607CN
Screw, w/washer, M3x6
1
128
16
XB4-7401-007CN
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
1
124
1A
XB4-7401-007CN
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
13
125
21
XB4-7401-007CN
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
12
126
24
XB4-7401-007CN
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
2
123
9
XB4-7401-007CN
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
2
124
2
XB4-7401-007CN
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
5
127
22
XB4-7401-007CN
Screw, tapping, pan head, M4x10
7
128
17
XB4-7401-407CN
Screw, tapping, truss head, M4x14
2
123
10
276 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
Table 43. Numerical parts list (continued)
ENWW
Part number
Description
Quantity Figure
Ref.
XB6-7300-407CN
Screw, PH M3x4
3
125
22
XB6-7300-607CN
Screw, w/washer, M3x6
1
123
12
Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams 277
278 Parts and diagrams
ENWW
Index
Symbols
? button
locating 52
using 184
Numerics
250-sheet tray. See tray 2
500-sheet tray. See tray 3
A
A4 paper settings 59, 60
access denied to control panel 54, 186
access plate, removing 159
accessories
included 16
ordering 27
part numbers 243
acclimating printer 180
acoustic specifications 21
adhesion, toner 213
adhesive labels
fuser modes 62
specifications 41
troubleshooting 220
agreements, service 28
alphabetical lists
error messages 186
part numbers 268
AppleTalk settings 67, 69
application settings 54
ARP duplicate address, error message 225
arrow buttons, control panel 52, 53
Attention light
locating 52
states 53
authorized resellers 28
auto continue setting 65
automatic duplexer solenoid (SL3)
operations 96
removing 158
B
Back button, control panel 52, 53
background, gray 213
basis weight
calculating 44
metric 45
beam operations 87, 90
belts
operations 95
removing 175
replacement intervals 74
bench repair warranty 27
bidirectional communications
operations 100
settings 67
troubleshooting 225
binding edge, duplex printing 59
ENWW
bins, output
feeding operations 95
included 17
jams 205
locating 22
top delivery assembly, removing 169
black dots, troubleshooting 212
black lines, troubleshooting 212
blank pages, troubleshooting 216
brands, media 218
brightness, display 65
buffers
EIO overflow 191
operations 101
page settings 67
scan overflow 196
serial I/O overflow 192
bulk returns, recycling 26
buttons, control panel 52, 53
C
cables
flat flexible, removing 152
part numbers 243
caliper, measuring 46
Cancel Job button
locating 52
using 53
Canceling... message 186
cardstock, fuser modes 62
carriage returns, settings 60
cartridges
authentication 77
cleaning near 75
EconoMode 63
error messages 186, 187
image formation operations 89, 91
inspecting 210
jams near, clearing 208
life expectancy 78
low or out 66, 80, 188
non-HP 77
part numbers 243
recycling 25
removing 112
safety information 23
storing 78
supplies status page 81
toner level 79
waste toner cleaning operations 94
cassettes. See tray 2; tray 3
CD-ROMs
documentation 243
HP support assistant 28
service parts information 28
characters, troubleshooting print quality 212, 214
charge eliminator 92
Charger Cleaned message 70
charging rollers, operations 89, 90
check mark button, control panel 52, 53
checklist, troubleshooting 182
Index
279
checks
Diagnostics menu 71
engine 201
half self-test 227
media 44
paper path 71, 228
power-on 85
self 228
chemicals, paper 43, 222
circuit
capacity requirements 20
diagrams 237
classes, HP Technical Training 242
Clean Post Charger message 70
cleaning
drum, image formation operations 94
fuser 76
media dust 223
printer, inside 75
printer, outside 76
spilled toner 23
transfer charging roller operations 94
cleaning page 63, 76
clearable warnings setting 65
clearing jams. See jams
clip gasket, handling precautions 111
clothing, toner on 23
coated media, troubleshooting 222
cold reset paper size 72
cold reset, performing 229
communications
operations 99, 100
settings 67
troubleshooting 225
compact discs
documentation 243
HP support assistant 28
service parts information 28
complex pages
storing in memory 101
troubleshooting 191
compression features, memory management 101
configuration page
Jetdirect print servers 199
printer 56, 198
configurations, printer 16
Configure Device menu 59
consumables. See supplies
consumption, power 25
280 Index
control panel
access denied 54, 186
alphabetical error messages 186
buttons and lights 52, 53
clearable warning settings 65
Configure Device menu 59
Diagnostics menu 71
display brightness 65
help 184
I/O menu 67
Information menu 56
language, setting 66, 229
locating 22
menu map 54
messages, troubleshooting 184
numerical error messages 190
operations 99
Paper-handling menu 57
Print quality menu 61
Printing menu 59
removing 120
Resets menu 70
Retrieve job menu 55
Service menu 72
settings, changing 54
System Setup menu 64
cooling fans
diagrams 234
low-voltage power supply operations 86
power-on sequence 85
removing 140
copies, setting default number 59
cotton bond paper 48
count, page 72, 198
country of origin 19
Courier font settings 60
covers
diagrams 246
DIMM, removing 115
error messages 186
front, removing 119
I/O, removing 113
left-side, removing 124
locating 22, 245
part numbers 247
rear, removing 116
top, removing 121
CPU
initialization sequence 85
jam detection operations 106
operating sequences 84
creases, troubleshooting 214
crooked pages, troubleshooting 214
curl
envelope specifications 39
label specifications 41
testing media 47
troubleshooting 62, 214, 217
custom media size settings 58, 59
Customer Care centers
HP Express Exchange program 27
reseller sales and service support 28
customer support websites 28, 242
cut-edge condition test 48
cut-off pages, preventing 101
cutout media, troubleshooting media 220
ENWW
D
darkness, setting 63
data
compression features 101
processing operations 99
Data light
locating 52
states 53
Data Received message 187
data transmission settings 67
datecode, firmware 198
declaration of conformity 24
default settings
NVRAM initialization 229
restoring 70
defect tables 211
defects, repetitive 213, 226
delay jams 106, 107
delivery delay jams 107
delivery operations 97
delivery sensor (PS2301)
diagrams 96, 105
jam detection operations 107
pickup/feed system operations
delivery stationary jams 107
density
operations 101
settings 63
troubleshooting 212
depth, printer 31
detection operations
jams 106
media 105
developing cylinder operations 86,
developing stage, image formation
DHCP settings 68
Diagnostics menu 71
diagrams, reference 230
dimensions, printer 20, 31
DIMMs
configuration page information
cover, locating 22
cover, removing 115
included 16
ordering 243
slots available 17
directory page 56
disconnecting power supply 111
display brightness 65
DLC/LLC settings 67, 69
documentation 243
door-open check 85
dots, troubleshooting 212
Down button, control panel 53
downloading printer drivers 28
dpi 17, 63
draft quality printing 63, 101, 210
drive assembly
locating 245
removing 148
drivers
downloading 28
settings 54
dropouts, troubleshooting 212
ENWW
95
drum
cleaning operations 94
developing stage 91
half-self-test functional check 227
image formation operations 90
image transfer operations 92
inspecting 210
operations 87
out 80
rotation test 228
duplex pickup paper sensor (PS503) 105
duplexer
binding settings 59
blank pages, settings 64
curl, troubleshooting 217
error messages 196
feeding operations 95
jam detection operations 106, 108
jams 206
media supported 37
models including 16
operations 98
pickup paper sensor (PS503) 108
sensors and solenoids 96
settings 59
solenoids, removing 158
troubleshooting 186
E
89
91
198
EconoMode 63, 101, 210
EIO cards
See also HP Jetdirect print servers
buffer overflow 191
communication operations 100
configuration page information 198
error messages 197
removing 114
settings 67
slots available 17
troubleshooting 225
e-label reader, removing 145
electrical
diagrams 237
specifications 20
electrostatic discharge (ESD), precautions for 111
eliminator, static charge 92
embedded Web server
security 69
toner status page 79
embossed media, troubleshooting 220
empty trays 189
end-of-life recycling programs 25
energy consumption 25
energy savings 18
Energy Star compliance 25
engine control system operations 86
engine controller
diagrams and part numbers 262
locating 245
engine controller PCA
diagrams and part numbers 263
removing 153
engine controller PCB
diagrams 235
operating sequences 84
pickup/feed system operations 95
engine test 201
Index
281
envelopes
default size, setting 59
margins 40
specifications 39
storing 40
troubleshooting 221
environment
acclimating printer 180
media storage 223
specifications, printer 21, 30
environmental stewardship 25
equivalence table, paper weight 45
e-rings 244
error messages
alphabetical list 186
numerical list 190
troubleshooting 184
ESD (electrostatic discharge), precautions for 111
Ethernet, link speeds 69
event log, clearing 72
expandability features 17
Express Exchange 27
eye contact, toner 23
F
face-up bin. See rear output bin
face-up sensor (PS502)
diagrams 96
operations 95
factory defaults
NVRAM initialization 229
restoring 70
faded print, troubleshooting 212
failures, power-on check 85
fans
diagrams 234
low-voltage power supply operations 86
power-on sequence 85
removing 140
fasteners 244
FastRes 17, 63
FCC regulations 24
features, printer 16, 17
feed belts
operations 95
removing 175
replacement intervals 74
feed rollers
error messages 191
replacement intervals 74
feed system
delivery operations 97
jam detection 106
paper feeding operations 95
sensors 96
sheet feeder operations 103
feeders. See tray 2; tray 3
feeding problems
envelopes 221
troubleshooting 218
fiber composition test, media 48
field replaceable units
part numbers 242
removing and replacing 111, 112
file directory page 56
fillers, paper 43
film transparencies. See transparencies
finish, media 46
282 Index
firmware
datecode 198
errors 193
first aid, toner safety 23
First mode, tray selection 64
flat flexible cable, removing 152
flexible cable, removing 152
flowchart, troubleshooting 182
fonts
compression features 101
Courier settings 60
included 17
lists, printing 56
PCL settings 60
storage operations 100
formatter
components 100
diagrams and part numbers 263
handling precautions 111
number 198
operations 99
pickup/feed system operations 95
removing 147
frame type settings 68
fraud hotline 77
front cover, removing 119
FRUs (field replaceable units)
part numbers 242
removing and replacing 111, 112
furnish test, media 48
fuser
cleaning 76
control circuit operations 86
diagrams 230
error messages 194
locating 245
modes 62
removing 141
replacement interval 74
fusing compatibility
envelopes 39
test 48
fusing stage, image formation 93
G
gasket, handling precautions 111
gateway settings 68
getting started guides 243
ghosting, troubleshooting 215
gloves, parts requiring 111
grain, paper 47
graphics, compression features 101
gray background, troubleshooting 213
groundwood, recycled paper 48
guides 243
H
half self-test functional check 227
harnesses, wire 111
heavy paper, fuser modes 62
height, printer 20, 31
held jobs 55, 64
help, control panel 52, 184
High Transfer toner setting 62
high-voltage power supply operations 86
host computer, communication operations 99
host name 68
HP authorized resellers 28
ENWW
HP Connect Online 242
HP Customer Care centers
Express Exchange 27
reseller sales and service support 28
HP Express Exchange 27
HP Jetdirect print servers
See also EIO cards
communication operations 100
configuration page 199
I/O menu settings 67
installation guide 225
models including 16
ordering 243
removing 114
settings 69
troubleshooting 225
HP PCL5e emulation 17
HP Printing Supplies Returns and Recycling 25
HP service agreements 28
HP Service Center, Express Exchange 27
HP support assistant CD-ROM 28
HP Technical Training 242
HP Web Jetadmin, toner status 79
HTTPS settings 69
humidity
changes, acclimating printer to 180
labels, storing 41
media, storing 43, 223
specifications, printer environment 21
I
I/O
buffer operations 101
buffer overflow messages 192
communication operations 99
switching, dynamic 102
I/O cover
locating 22
removing 113
I/O menu 67
Image Adapt 101
image defect tables 211
image formation system
components 88
developing stage 91
drum cleaning stage 94
fusing stage 93
laser/scanner operations 87
laser-beam exposure stage 90
operations 89
primary charging stage 90
separation stage 92
transfer charging roller cleaning stage 94
transfer stage 92
troubleshooting 227
image quality
EconoMode 210
features 17
settings 63, 101
troubleshooting 209, 211
images, repeating 215
imaging drum. See drum
Information menu 56
ingestion, toner 23
inhalation, toner 23
ink cartridges. See print cartridges
inks, troubleshooting 219
input trays. See trays
inspecting parts 74
ENWW
installation requirements 30
installed personalities and options 198
insufficient memory 191
interface operations 100
internal components, parts and diagrams 250
INTR (initial rotation) period 84
IP address 68, 225
IPX/SPX setting 68
IPX/SPX settings 67
J
jams
common causes and locations 204
detection operations 106
error messages 191
fuser mode settings 62
multifeeds 218
output areas 205
paper access area 206
print cartridge area 208
recovery settings 66
residual paper check 85
tray 2 or 3 207
troubleshooting 203
Jetadmin, toner status 79
Jetdirect print servers
See also EIO cards
communication operations 100
configuration page 199
I/O menu settings 67
installation guide 225
models including 16
ordering 243
removing 114
settings 69
troubleshooting 225
jobs
canceling 53
stored 55, 64
K
keys, control panel 52, 53
L
labels
fuser modes 62
specifications 41
troubleshooting 220
landscape orientation, setting as default 60
language, control panel 66, 229
languages, printer
included 17
list of installed 198
not available 186
PCL settings 60
setting default 65
switching 102
laser safety information 24
laser/scanner assembly
operations 87, 90
precautions 111
removing 143
laser/scanner plate, removing 144
laser-beam exposure stage, image formation 90
LaserJet supplies, recycling 25
latent image formation 87, 90
leading edge, detection operations 95, 106
left-side cover, removing 124
Index
283
lenses, operations 87, 90
letter paper, override A4 settings 59
letterhead
fuser modes 62
troubleshooting 219
life expectancies
parts 74
print cartridges 78
light print
density setting 63
troubleshooting 212
lights, control panel 52, 53
line feed settings 60
lines, troubleshooting 212
link speed settings 69
lists, parts
alphabetical 268
numerical 273
load tray messages 187
locked control panel menus 54, 186
loose toner, troubleshooting 213
low toner 66, 80
low-voltage power supply operations 86
LSTR (last rotation) period 84
M
macros, downloaded 100
mailing labels. See labels
main motor
image formation operations 89
locating 234
low-voltage power supply operations 86
power-on sequence 85
removing 151
sheet feeder operations 103
maintenance, inspecting parts 74
See also cleaning; replacing parts
manual feed settings 60, 64, 188
manuals 243
map, control panel menu 54
margins
envelopes 40
registration settings 61
mass storage devices
error messages 196
information pages 56
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 23, 26
measurement units, setting 58
media
brands, troubleshooting 218
chemically treated, troubleshooting 222
coated 222
custom sizes 58, 59
default setting, restoring 72
default size, setting 59
detection operations 105
duplexer, supported sizes and types 37
dust, cleaning 223
envelope specifications 39
equivalence table 45
fillers 43
fuser modes 62
fusing compatibility 39
grain test 47
jams. See jams
label specifications 41
284 Index
media (continued)
ordering 242
paper path test 71, 228
recycled 25, 48
reducing use 25
shipping 43
size detection 105
special, troubleshooting 219
specifications 34
storing 43, 223
tests 44
tools, testing 49
transparencies 42
tray 1, supported sizes and types 35
tray 2, supported sizes and types 36
tray 3, supported sizes and types 36, 37
tray selection 35, 64
tray settings 57, 58
troubleshooting 38, 217
memory
configuration page information 198
error messages 190
included 18
insufficient 191
management features 101
NVRAM errors 196
NVRAM initialization 229
operations 100
ordering 243
printer models, included 16
RAM disk setting 66
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) 101
menus, control panel
access denied 54, 186
Configure Device 59
Diagnostics 71
I/O 67
Information 56
map 54
Paper-handling 57
Print quality 61
Printing 59
Resets 70
Retrieve job 55
Service 72
System Setup 64
messages
alphabetical list 186
control panel, troubleshooting 184
numerical list 190
settings 65
MEt (Memory Enhancement technology) 101
metal, handling precautions 111
metric equivalents 45
micrometers 46
microprocessor
initialization sequence 85
jam detection operations 106
operations sequences 84
mirrors, operations 87, 90
misfeeds, troubleshooting 218
misformed characters, troubleshooting 214
mismatch
size 189
type 190
model number, locating 19
models, printer 16
moisture content, measuring 46
More Separation setting 62
ENWW
motors
diagrams 234
error messages 196
image formation operations 89
low-voltage power supply operations 86
main, removing 151
paper feeding operations 95
power-on sequence 85
MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet) 23, 26
multifeeds, troubleshooting 218
N
navigation buttons, control panel 52, 53
NetWare, Novell 68, 225
networks
settings 67
troubleshooting 225
See also HP Jetdirect print servers
noise specifications 21
non-HP print cartridges 77
nonvolatile memory (NVRAM)
errors 196
initializing 229
operations 100
Novell NetWare 68, 225
number of copies, setting default 59
numerical lists
error messages 190
part numbers 273
NVRAM
errors 196
initialization 229
operations 100
O
oblique roller 95
on/off switch
locating 22
removing 125
online help 52, 184
operating environment
specifications 21, 30
temperature changes, acclimating printer 180
operations
delivery 97
duplexer 98
engine control system 86
formatter system 99
image formation system 88, 89
jam detection 106
laser/scanner assembly 87
media detection 105
pickup/feed system 95
power supply PCA 86
power-on sequence 85
sequences 84
sheet feeders 103
timing chart 239
Order Cartridge message 66, 80, 188
ordering
accessories 27
parts 242
orientation, setting default 60
out of toner 66, 80
output bins. See bins, output
output feed rollers, replacement intervals 74
ENWW
output quality
EconoMode 210
features 17
settings 63, 101
troubleshooting 209, 211
overhead transparencies. See transparencies
override A4/letter 59
ozone emissions 25
P
packaging media 43
page count 72, 198
page orientation default 60
Page Protect 101
pages per minute 17
pan head screws 244
paper
brands, troubleshooting 218
chemically treated, troubleshooting 222
coated 222
custom sizes 58, 59
default setting, restoring 72
default size, setting 59
detection operations 105
duplexer, supported sizes and types 37
dust, cleaning 223
fillers 43
fuser modes 62
fusing compatibility 39
grain test 47
jams. See jams
ordering 242
recycled 25, 48
reducing use 25
shipping 43
size detection 105
special, troubleshooting 219
specifications 34
storing 43, 223
tests 44
tools, testing 49
tray 1, supported sizes and types 35
tray 2, supported sizes and types 36
tray 3, supported sizes and types 36, 37
tray selection 35, 64
tray settings 57, 58
troubleshooting 38, 217
weight equivalence table 45
paper access area jams 206
paper jams. See jams
paper path
cleaning 75
duplexer operations 98
feeding operations 95
jam detection 106
sheet feeder operations 103
test 71, 228
troubleshooting 217
paper trays. See trays
Paper-handling menu 57
parallel
buffer error messages 192
cables, part numbers 243
communications, settings 67
interface operations 100
port, included 18, 33
part numbers
alphabetical list 268
numerical list 273
Index
285
partners, HP 242
parts
CD-ROM information 28
ordering 242
removing and replacing 111, 112
replacement intervals 74
path, paper
cleaning 75
duplexer operations 98
feeding operations 95
jam detection 106
sheet feeder operations 103
test 71, 228
troubleshooting 217
Pause/Resume button
locating 52
using 53
PCAs, diagrams and part numbers 263
PCL
driver settings 60
font lists 56
language features 17
perforated media, troubleshooting 220
periodic replacement, parts 74
phone numbers
authorized resellers 28
fraud hotline 77
ordering parts 242
recycling information 26
reseller sales and service support 28
photosensitive drum. See drum
pickup assembly
diagrams 260
part numbers 261
pickup delay jams 106
pickup rollers
diagrams 230
operations 103
replacement intervals 74
tray 1, removing 130
tray 2, removing 136, 176
tray 3, replacing 176
pickup sensor flag, removing 132
pickup stationary jams 106
pickup/feed system
delivery operations 97
jam detection 106
paper feeding operations 95
sensors 96
sheet feeder operations 103
PINs
Service menu 72
stored print jobs 55
PJL (Printer Job Language) 102
Planet Partners website 26
plastics, recycling 25
pliers, required 111
portrait orientation, setting as default 60
ports
included 18
locating 33
troubleshooting for parallel buffer overflow 192
post charger message 70
PostScript (PS) emulation 17
power
consumption 20, 25
requirements 20
startup sequence 85
troubleshooting 183
286 Index
power supply
diagrams 236, 258, 263
disconnecting 111
locating 245
part numbers 259
PCA, components 86
removing 162
power switch
locating 22
removing 125
PowerSave mode
control panel message 188
power consumption specifications 20
settings 65, 70
preprinted media
fuser modes 62
troubleshooting 219
prepunched paper, fuser modes 62
pressure roller, diagrams 230
primary charging roller operations 86, 89, 90
primary charging stage, image formation 90
print cartridges
authentication 77
cleaning near 75
EconoMode 63
error messages 186, 187
image formation operations 89, 91
inspecting 210
jams near, clearing 208
life expectancy 78
low or out 66, 80, 188
non-HP 77
part numbers 243
recycling 25
removing 112
safety information 23
storing 78
supplies status page 81
toner level 79
waste toner cleaning operations 94
print density
operations 101
settings 63
troubleshooting 212
print jobs
canceling 53
stored 55, 64
PRINT period 84
print quality
EconoMode 210
features 17
settings 63, 101
troubleshooting 209, 211
Print quality menu 61
print servers. See HP Jetdirect print servers
printer drivers
downloading 28
settings 54
Printer Job Language (PJL) 102
Printer Status and Alerts 79
Printing menu 59
private jobs 55
problem solving. See troubleshooting
processor
initialization sequence 85
jam detection operations 106
operations sequences 84
production code 19
program settings 54
ENWW
ProRes 17, 63
PS (PostScript)
error page settings 60
font lists 56
wait timeout 198
punched paper, fuser modes 62
purchasing. See ordering
Q
quality
EconoMode 210
features 17
settings 63, 101
troubleshooting 209, 211
quick copy jobs 55, 64
R
radio frequency interference (RFI) shield, handling
precautions 111
RAM
disk setting 66
included 18
operations 100
printer models, included 16
read-only memory (ROM) operations 100
Ready light
locating 52
states 53
rear cover, removing 116
rear output bin
feeding operations 95
jams 205
locating 22
rear output sensor (PS502)
diagrams 105
recovery, jams 66
recycled paper 25, 48
recycling supplies 25
reference diagrams 230
reference materials 243
registration assembly, locating 245
registration rollers
operations 95
removing 172
registration settings 61
registration shutter operations 95
regulatory information 24
removing parts 111, 112
repair warranty 27
repeating images, troubleshooting 215
repetitive defects, troubleshooting 213, 226
Replace Cartridge message 66, 80, 189
replacement intervals
parts 74
print cartridges 78
replacing parts 111, 112
reports
configuration page 198
HP Jetdirect configuration page 199
Information menu 56
supplies status page 200
usage page 200
reseller sales and service support 28
Resets menu 70
resetting printer 229
residual paper check 85
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) 63, 101
resolution settings 63
ENWW
restoring default settings 70
REt (Resolution Enhancement technology) 63, 101
retention, job 55, 64
Retrieve job menu, control panel 55
returns, recycling program 26
reverse motor
operations 95
power-on sequence 85
reversed paper sensor (PS501)
diagrams 96, 105
jam detection operations 107
pickup/feed system operations 95
reversing delay jams 107
reversing stationary jams 107
revision level 19
RFI shield, handling precautions 111
rollers
diagrams 230
feed, error messages 191
image defects, troubleshooting 226
image formation operations 89
operations 86, 94
paper feed operations 95
registration, removing 172
replacement intervals 74
transfer, removing 174
tray 1 pickup, removing 130
tray 2 pickup, removing 136, 176
tray 3 pickup, replacing 176
ROM operations 100
rotation test, drum 228
rough paper, fuser modes 62
ruler, repetitive defect 226
S
safety information
lasers 24
parts removal 111
toner cartridges 23
sales and service offices 28
scan buffer errors 196
scattered toner, troubleshooting 215
screwdrivers, required 111
screws
self-tapping, installing 111
types of 244
security, embedded web server 69
Select (check mark) button, control panel 52, 53
self test 228
self-tapping screws 111, 244
sensor flag, removing 132
sensors
diagrams 232
media detection 105
pickup/feed system 95, 96
sheet feeders 104
separation pads
diagrams 230
operations 95, 103
replacement intervals 74
tray 1, removing 133
tray 2, removing 139
tray 3, removing 178
separation stage, image formation 92
sequences
power-on 85
print periods 84
serial buffer overflow 192
serial number 19, 72
Index
287
servers. See HP Jetdirect print servers
service agreements 28
service centers, Express Exchange 27
service ID 72, 198
Service menu 72
service parts CD-ROM 28
settings
control panel 54
PCL driver 60
restoring defaults 70, 229
setup guides 243
setup requirements 30
sheet feeder operations 103
sheet metal, handling precautions 111
Sheffield rating, media 46
shipping media 43
site requirements 30
size
custom, media 58, 59
envelopes 39
media, default 59, 72
media, detection operations 105
mismatch message 189
printer 20, 31
tray settings 57, 58
unexpected error message 192
skew
correction operations 95
troubleshooting 214
skin contact, toner 23
smeared toner, troubleshooting 213
smoothness, media 46
software settings 54
solenoids
diagrams 233
low-voltage power supply operations 86
pickup/feed system 96
removing 158
sheet feeders 103, 104
solving problems. See troubleshooting
source routing settings 68
space requirements 20, 31
special media
default size, setting 59
envelopes 39
fuser modes 62
labels 41
transparencies 42
troubleshooting 219
specifications
acoustic 21
envelopes 39
labels 41
media 34
operating environment 21
physical 20
site requirements 30
transparencies 42
specks, toner 212
speed
data transmission settings 67
printer 17
printer models 16
resolution settings 63
spilled toner 23
288 Index
stages, image formation
developing 91
drum cleaning 94
fusing 93
laser-beam exposure 90
primary charging 90
separation 92
transfer 92
transfer charging roller cleaning 94
troubleshooting 227
standard output bin. See top output bin
static charge eliminator 92
static discharge, precautions for 111
stationary jams 106, 107
status
print cartridges 79
supplies 56, 81, 200
STBY (standby) period 84
storage devices
error messages 196
information pages 56
storage, job 55, 64
storing
envelopes 40
labels 41
media 43, 223
print cartridges 78
printer 21
subnet mask 68
supplies
error messages 190
media tests 49
ordering 242
part numbers 243
recycling 25
status 79, 81
supplies status page 56, 200
support
assistant CD-ROM 28
fraud hotline 77
HP Express Exchange 27
reseller sales and service 28
websites 28, 242
switches
diagrams 231
power, locating 22
power, removing 125
synthetic media, troubleshooting 222
syslog server 68
System Setup menu 64
T
TCP/IP settings 67, 68
technical support. See support
Technical Training, HP 242
telephone numbers
authorized resellers 28
fraud hotline 77
ordering parts 242
recycling information 26
reseller sales and service support 28
temperature
changes, acclimating printer to 180
fusing compatibility, media 39
labels, storing 41
media, storing 43, 223
operating environment specifications 21
ENWW
tests
Diagnostics menu 71
engine 201
half self-test functional check 227
media 44
paper path 71, 228
power-on 85
self 228
text, troubleshooting 212, 214
theory of operations. See operations
three-hole punched paper, fuser modes 62
timeouts
I/O settings 67
job storage 64
PowerSave mode 20, 65
PS wait 198
TCP connections 68
timing chart 239
Token Ring networks 68
toner
density setting 63
EconoMode 63, 101, 210
fusing operations 93
High Transfer mode 62
image formation operations 91
loose, troubleshooting 213
low or out 66, 80
safety information 23
scatter, troubleshooting 215
smeared, troubleshooting 213
specks, troubleshooting 212
status 79, 81
waste cleaning operations 94
toner cartridges. See print cartridges
tools
media tests 49
service, required 111
top cover
diagrams 248
error messages 186
locating 22, 245
part numbers 249
removing 121
top output bin
delivery assembly, removing 169
feeding operations 95
jams 205
locating 22
top-of-page sensor (PS2305)
diagrams 96, 104, 105
operations 95, 106
torque values, fasteners 244
total pages printed 72, 198
trailing edge, detection operations 95, 106
transfer charging roller
cleaning operations 85, 94
image formation operations 89, 92
power supply operations 86
transfer roller
diagrams 230
removing 174
replacement interval 74
transfer stage, image formation 92
transparencies
fuser modes 62
specifications 42
troubleshooting 222
ENWW
tray 1
diagrams 230
feeding operations 95
jam detection operations 106
locating 22
media sensor (PS3908) 96
media supported 17, 35
paper sensor (PS3208) 105
pickup roller
removing 130
pickup solenoid 9SL2) 96
registration settings 61
removing 126
selecting 35, 64
separation pad, removing 133
settings 57
solenoids, removing 158
See also trays
tray 2
diagrams 230
feeding operations 95, 103
jam detection operations 106
jams 207
locating 22, 245
media sensor (PS1305) 96
media supported 17
models including 16
ordering 243
part numbers 243
pickup roller, removing 136, 176
pickup solenoid (SL1) 96
registration settings 61
removing 112
selecting 64
sensor (PS1305) 105
sensors and solenoids 104, 105
separation pad, removing 139
settings 57
solenoids, removing 158
supported media 36
See also trays
tray 3
feeding operations 95, 103
jam detection operations 106
jams 207
media supported 17
models including 16
ordering 243
part number 243
pickup roller, replacing 176
registration settings 61
selecting 35, 64
sensors and solenoids 104, 105
separation pad, removing 178
settings 58
supported media 36, 37
See also trays
tray2
selecting 35
Index
289
trays
default media size, setting 59
empty, error messages 189
features 17
feeding operations 95
jam detection operations 106
jams 207
load messages 187
locating 22
media detection 105
media supported 17
models including 16
ordering 243
paper path test 71, 228
registration settings 61
selecting 35, 64
settings 57, 58
size mismatch message 189
type mismatch error message 190
unexpected size or type error message 192
troubleshooting
blank pages 216
communications 225
control panel messages 184
curl 62, 214, 217
drum rotation functional check 228
duplexer 186, 196
engine test 201
envelopes 221
error messages, alphabetical 186
error messages, numerical 190
faded print 212
flowchart 182
ghosting 215
gray background 213
half self-test functional check 227
HP Jetdirect print servers 225
image quality 209, 211
jams 203
labels 220
lines 212
media 38, 217
misfeeds 218
power-on 183
preliminary operating checks 180
process 180
reference diagrams 230
repetitive defects 213, 226
skew 214
special media 219
text quality 212, 214
toner 212, 213, 215
transparencies 222
wrinkled pages 214
truss head screws 244
type error messages, media 190, 193
V
vacuuming toner 23
ventilation requirements 30
vertical lines, troubleshooting 212
voltage specifications 20
W
WAIT period 84
wait timeout 198
warning messages. See messages
warnings, settings 65
warranty 27
washing off toner 23
waste toner cleaning operations 94
Web Jetadmin, toner status 79
websites
drivers 28
Energy Star 25
HP Jetdirect installation guide 225
Material Data Safety Sheet (MSDS) 26
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 23
ordering parts 242
print media guide 34
recycling information 26
support information 28
weight
envelopes 39
equivalence table, paper 45
media, calculating 44
printer 20
white pages, troubleshooting 216
Wide A4 settings 60
width, printer 20, 31
wire harnesses, replacing 111
wiring diagrams 237
wood-pulp test kits 48
wrinkled pages, troubleshooting 214
U
unexpected size or type error message 192
unit of measure, setting 58
UNIX settings 60
unplugging printer 111
Up button, control panel 52, 53
usage page 56, 200
USB
cables, part numbers 243
interface operations 100
port, included 18, 33
user guides 243
290 Index
ENWW
ENWW
Index
291
292
Index
ENWW
copyright © 2003
Hewlett-Packard Company
www.hp.com/support/lj2300
*Q2472-90911*
*Q2472-90911*
Q2472-90911